Xtrail 05 PDF

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
SECTION AT B
AT
E
CONTENTS
INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 5 Accurate Repair ...................................................... 45 F
Alphabetical Index .................................................... 5 A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 50
DTC No. Index ......................................................... 6 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 51
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 7 Inspections before Trouble Diagnosis .................... 52 G
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System Road Test ............................................................... 57
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Check before Engine Is Started .............................. 57
SIONER” .................................................................. 7 Check at Idle ........................................................... 58
H
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Cruise Test — Part 1 .............................................. 60
of A/T and Engine .................................................... 7 Cruise Test — Part 2 .............................................. 63
Precautions .............................................................. 7 Cruise Test — Part 3 .............................................. 64
Service Notice or Precautions .................................. 9 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ...................... 66 I
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 10 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
PREPARATION ..........................................................11 Lock-Up .................................................................. 66
Special Service Tools ..............................................11 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 67 J
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 15 TCM Terminals and Reference Value ..................... 77
A/T FLUID ................................................................. 17 CONSULT-II Function (A/T) .................................... 80
Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 17 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ........... 91
K
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................ 18 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE .............. 95
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ...................................... 18 Description .............................................................. 95
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................... 21 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 95
Cross-Sectional View ............................................. 21 Possible Cause ....................................................... 95 L
Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 22 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 95
TCM Function ......................................................... 31 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ................................ 96
CAN Communication .............................................. 32 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 97 M
Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................... 32 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP)
Line Pressure Control ............................................ 33 SWITCH .................................................................... 98
Shift Control ........................................................... 34 Description .............................................................. 98
Lock-Up Control ..................................................... 35 CONSULT-II Reference Value ................................ 98
Engine Brake Control (Overrun Clutch Control) ..... 36 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 98
Control Valve .......................................................... 38 Possible Cause ....................................................... 98
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 39 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 98
Introduction ............................................................ 39 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ......................... 99
OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 39 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 101
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 39 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 39 CIRCUIT .................................................................. 104
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 42 Description ............................................................ 104
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 43 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 104
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 43 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 104
Fail-Safe ................................................................. 43 Possible Cause ..................................................... 104
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 104
Revision: 2005 March AT-1 2005 X-Trail

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 105 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) .147
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 106 Description ............................................................ 147
Component Inspection .......................................... 108 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 147
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REV- On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 147
OLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 109 Possible Cause ..................................................... 147
Description ............................................................ 109 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 148
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 109 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ........................ 149
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 109 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 150
Possible Cause ..................................................... 109 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE.155
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 109 Description ............................................................ 155
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ..........................111 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 155
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 112 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 155
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 115 Possible Cause ..................................................... 155
Description ............................................................ 115 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 155
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 115 Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ............................ 157
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 115 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 158
Possible Cause ..................................................... 115 Component Inspection .......................................... 161
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 115 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ............... 162
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ......................... 117 Description ............................................................ 162
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 118 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 162
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ................. 120 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 162
Description ............................................................ 120 Possible Cause ..................................................... 162
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 120 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 162
Possible Cause ..................................................... 120 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ........................... 163
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 120 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 164
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG ......................... 122 Component Inspection .......................................... 166
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 123 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ............... 167
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION ................ 125 Description ............................................................ 167
Description ............................................................ 125 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 167
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 125 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 167
Possible Cause ..................................................... 125 Possible Cause ..................................................... 167
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 125 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 167
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG ........................ 127 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ........................... 168
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 128 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 169
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION ................ 130 Component Inspection .......................................... 171
Description ............................................................ 130 DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 130 (APP) SENSOR ....................................................... 172
Possible Cause ..................................................... 130 Description ............................................................ 172
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 130 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 172
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG ........................ 132 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 172
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 133 Possible Cause ..................................................... 172
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION ................ 135 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 172
Description ............................................................ 135 Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS ............................... 174
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 135 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 175
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 135 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
Possible Cause ..................................................... 135 VALVE ...................................................................... 177
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG ........................ 137 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 177
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH Possible Cause ..................................................... 177
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 142 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 177
Description ............................................................ 142 Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ...................... 178
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 142 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 179
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 142 Component Inspection .......................................... 181
Possible Cause ..................................................... 142 DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ................... 182
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV .............................. 143 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 182
Component Inspection .......................................... 146 Possible Cause ..................................................... 182

DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 182 “2” → “1” on Position ............................................ 237
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ...................... 184 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake .... 240 A
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 185 TCM Self-Diagnosis Does Not Activate ................ 244
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 251
SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE). 187 Control Device Removal and Installation .............. 251 B
Description ........................................................... 187 Adjustment of A/T Position ................................... 252
CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 187 Checking of A/T Position ...................................... 253
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 187 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .................................... 254
Possible Cause .................................................... 187 Description ............................................................ 254 AT
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 187 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ......... 254
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ........................ 189 Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ........................... 255
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 190 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 256 D
Component Inspection ......................................... 193 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ...................................... 258
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT. 194 Components ......................................................... 258
Description ........................................................... 194 Removal ............................................................... 258 E
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 194 Installation ............................................................ 259
Possible Cause .................................................... 194 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 260
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 194 Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators .......... 260
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ............................ 195 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch ..................... 263 F
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 196 Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement ................ 265
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT Revolution Sensor Replacement .......................... 267
(ROM) ..................................................................... 198 AIR BREATHER HOSE .......................................... 268 G
Description ........................................................... 198 Removal and Installation ...................................... 268
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 198 TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ...................................... 269
Possible Cause .................................................... 198 Removal and Installation ...................................... 269 H
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 198 OVERHAUL ............................................................ 272
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 199 Components ......................................................... 272
DTC CONTROL UNIT(EEPROM) ........................... 200 Oil Channel ........................................................... 278
I
Description ........................................................... 200 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings,
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 200 Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 279
Possible Cause .................................................... 200 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 280
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 200 Disassembly ......................................................... 280 J
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 201 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ..................... 296
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS .......... 202 Manual Shaft ........................................................ 296
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 202 Oil Pump ............................................................... 299 K
O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ..... 205 Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 304
Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” and “N” Position. 207 Control Valve Upper Body .................................... 313
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward Control Valve Lower Body .................................... 317 L
When Pushed ....................................................... 208 Reverse Clutch ..................................................... 320
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves ............................. 209 High Clutch ........................................................... 325
Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position ...........................211 Forward and Overrun Clutches ............................ 331
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position. 212 Low & Reverse Brake ........................................... 338 M
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D”, “2” or “1” Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Over-
Position ................................................................ 215 run Clutch Hub ...................................................... 342
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ..................... 217 Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear and
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: Bearing Retainer ................................................... 346
D4 → D2 ............................................................... 220 Band Servo Piston Assembly ............................... 352
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ............................... 223 Final Drive ............................................................ 358
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ............................... 226 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 362
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up ........................... 228 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 362
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition ................. 229 Adjustment (1) ...................................................... 363
Lock-Up Is Not Released ..................................... 231 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 368
Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle (Light Brak- Adjustment (2) ...................................................... 375
ing D4 → D3 ) ....................................................... 232 Assembly (3) ......................................................... 378
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Con- SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 385
trol Switch “ON” → “OFF” ..................................... 234 General Specifications .......................................... 385
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears .................... 385
“D” → “2” Position ................................................ 235 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing
A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever Look-Up ................................................................ 385

Stall Revolution ..................................................... 385 Output Shaft .......................................................... 392
Line Pressure ....................................................... 385 Bearing Retainer ................................................... 392
Control Valves ....................................................... 386 Total End Play ....................................................... 392
Accumulator .......................................................... 386 Reverse Clutch End Play ...................................... 392
Clutch and Brakes ................................................ 387 Removal and Installation ....................................... 393
Final Drive ............................................................ 389 Shift Solenoid Valves ............................................ 393
Planetary Carrier and Oil Pump ............................ 390 Solenoid Valves .................................................... 393
Input Shaft ............................................................ 390 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 393
Reduction Pinion Gear ......................................... 391 Revolution Sensor ................................................. 393
Band Servo ........................................................... 391 Dropping Resistor ................................................. 393

INDEX FOR DTC
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024

A
Alphabetical Index ACS008HT
NOTE:
If DTC “U1000” is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “DTC U1000 CAN B
COMMUNICATION LINE”. Refer to AT-95 .
DTC
Items
CONSULT-II Reference page AT
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
GST*1
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-120
D
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 AT-125
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-130
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 AT-135 E
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 AT-147
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-104
BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN — AT-187 F
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 AT-95
CONTROL UNIT (RAM) — AT-198
G
CONTROL UNIT (ROM) — AT-198
CONT UNIT(EEP ROM) — AT-200
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 AT-115 H
LINE PRESSURE S/V P0745 AT-155
OVERRUN CLUTCH S/V P1760 AT-177
I
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-98
SHIFT SOLENOID/V A*2 P0750 AT-162
SHIFT SOLENOID/V B*2 P0755 AT-167 J

T/C CLUTCH SOL/V P0740 AT-142
THROTTLE POSI SEN*2 P1705 AT-172 K

3 P0720 AT-109
VHCL SPEED SEN·A/T*
VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR — AT-182
L
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time. M

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC No. Index ACS008HU
NOTE:
If DTC “U1000” is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “DTC U1000 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE”. Refer to AT-95 .
DTC
Items
CONSULT-II Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
GST*1
P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-98
P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-104
P0720 VHCL SPEED SEN·A/T*3 AT-109
P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-115
P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-120
P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-125
P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-130
P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-135
P0740 T/C CLUTCH SOL/V AT-142
P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-147
P0745 LINE PRESSURE S/V AT-155
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID/V A*2 AT-162
P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID/V B*2 AT-167
P1705 THROTTLE POSI SEN*2 AT-172

P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH S/V AT-177
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-95
— BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN AT-187
— CONTROL UNIT (RAM) AT-198
— CONTROL UNIT (ROM) AT-198
— CONT UNIT(EEP ROM) AT-200
— VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR AT-182
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.

PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ACS007QJ
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual. AT
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. D
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. E
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors. F
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ACS007QK
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the G
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery negative cable from battery nega- H
tive terminal before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sen-
sors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connectors are free from water, I
grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. J
● Be sure to connect the rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber
tube may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection sys-
tem, etc. K
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
L
Precautions ACS007QN
● Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness con-

nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
M
negative cable from battery negative terminal. Failure to do
so may damage the TCM. Because battery voltage is
applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned off.
SEF289H

PRECAUTIONS
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
AAT470A
● Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal

inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly
or not. Refer to AT-77, "TCM Terminals and Reference
Value" .
MEF040DA
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirmation
Procedure” if the repair is completed.
● Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the out-
side of the transaxle. It is important to prevent the internal parts
from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
● Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
● Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common
shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation SEF217U
of the transaxle.
● Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
● All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
● Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled.
● It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
● The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent
springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
● Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
● Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
● Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
● Clean or replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to
AT-9, "ATF COOLER SERVICE" .
● After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF.
● When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque
converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer
to “Changing A/T Fluid”, AT-17, "A/T FLUID" .

PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice or Precautions ACS007QO
ATF COOLER SERVICE A

If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,
inspect and clean the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using
cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. Check Service Bulletins for latest A/T oil cooler cleaning pro- B
cedure. For radiator replacement, refer to CO-11, "RADIATOR" , CO-14, "RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)" .
TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE
The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions: AT
● External leaks in the hub weld area.
● Converter hub is scored or damaged.
D
● Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft.
● Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines.
● Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter. E
● Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses
have been made. (Converter clutch material may be glazed.)
● Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze. F
● Internal malfunction of stator roller clutch.
● Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter).
● Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet indicates that lining material came G
from converter when no internal parts in unit are worn or damaged.
The torque converter should not be replaced if:
● The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles. H
● The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged.
● Transaxle malfunction did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch
plate lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter. I
● Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter
clutch damper plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic,
such as taxi, delivery or police use. J
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
● A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
K
the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator lamp or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the
table on AT-82, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" for the indicator used to display each self-diag-
nostic result.
● The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM mem- L
ories.
Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC” on AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to com-
plete the repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL. M
● The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when
the O/D OFF indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions.
– PNP switch
– A/T 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear function
*: For details of OBD-II, refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" .
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-44, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" .

PRECAUTIONS
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ACS007QP
When reading wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
● PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING"
When performing trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● GI-10, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses"
● GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"

PREPARATION
PREPARATION PFP:00100
A
Special Service Tools ACS007QQ
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number B
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
KV381054S0 ● Removing differential side bearing outer race

AT
(J-34286) ● Removing idler gear bearing outer race
Puller
a: 250 mm (9.84 in)
b: 160 mm (6.30 in)
D
NT414
ST33400001 ● Installing differential side oil seal

E
(J-26082) ● Installing oil pump housing oil seal
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia. F
NT086
G
KV40100621 Installing differential side oil seal (With AWD models)
(J-25273) a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
Drift b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
H
I
NT086
ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure

(J-34301)
Oil pressure gauge set J
1. ST25051001
(J-34301)
Oil pressure gauge K
2. ST25052000
(J-34301)
Hose L
3. ST25053000
(J-25695-3)
Joint pipe
NT097 M
4. ST25054000
(J-25695-4)
Adapter
5. ST25055000
(J-25695-5)
Adapter
ST27180001 Removing idler gear
(J-25726-A) a: 100 mm (3.94 in)
Puller b: 110 mm (4.33 in)
c: M8 x 1.25P
NT424

PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
ST23540000 Removing and installing parking rod plate and

(J-25689-A) manual plate retaining pins
Pin punch a: 2.3 mm (0.091 in) dia.
b: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
NT442
ST25710000 Aligning groove of manual shaft and hole of

(J-25689-A) transaxle case
Pin punch a: 2 mm (0.08 in) dia.
NT410
KV32101000 ● Installing manual shaft retaining pin

(J-25689-A) ● Removing and installing pinion mate shaft lock pin
Pin punch
a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
NT410
KV31102400 Removing and installing clutch return springs

(J-34285) a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
Clutch spring compressor b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
NT423
KV40100630 ● Installing reduction pinion gear bearing inner race

(J-26092) ● Installing idler gear bearing inner race
Drift
a: 67.5 mm (2.657 in) dia.
b: 44 mm (1.73 in) dia.
c: 38.5 mm (1.516 in) dia.
NT107
ST30720000 Installing idler gear bearing outer race

(J-25405) a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
Bearing installer b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
NT115
ST35321000 Installing output shaft bearing

( — ) a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
NT073

PREPARATION
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description A
Tool name
ST33230000 Installing differential side bearing inner race

(J-25805-01) a: 51 mm (2.01 in) dia. B
Drift b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
AT
NT084
ST33220000 Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim D

( — ) a: 37 mm (1.46 in) dia.
c: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
E
NT085
F
ST3306S001 Removing differential side bearing inner race
(J-22888-D) a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
Differential side bearing b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
puller set c: 130 mm (5.12 in) G
1. ST33051001 d: 135 mm (5.31 in)
(J-22888-D) e: 100 mm (3.94 in)
Puller H
2. ST33061000
AMT153
(J-8107-2)
Adapter
I
ST3127S000 ● Checking final drive assembly turning torque
(J-25765-A) ● Checking reduction pinion gear turning torque
Preload gauge
1. GG91030000 J
(J-25765-A)
Torque wrench
2. HT62940000 K
( — )
Socket adapter
NT124
3. HT62900000 L
( — )
Socket adapter
ST35271000 Installing idler gear
(J-26091) a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia. M
NT115

PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
KV38107700 Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim

(J-39713)
Preload adapter
NT087
KV38105210 ● Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim

(J-39883) ● Checking fluid drive assembly turning torque
Preload adapter
NT075

PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools ACS007QR
A
Tool name Description
Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

B
AT
PBIC0190E
Puller Removing idler gear bearing inner race D
NT077
F
Puller Removing reduction pinion gear bearing inner
race
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. G
NT411 H
Drift Installing radial needle bearing on bearing
retainer
a: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia.
I
J
NT083
Drift Installing manual shaft oil seal

a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
K
L
NT083
Drift Removing radial needle bearing from bearing

retainer M
a: 33.5 mm (1.319 in) dia.
NT083

PREPARATION
Tool name Description
Drift Installing differential side bearing outer race

(RH side)
a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia.
NT083
Drift Installing differential side bearing outer race

(LH side)
a: 100 mm (3.94 in) dia.
NT083

A/T FLUID
A/T FLUID PFP:KLE40

A
Checking A/T Fluid ACS007QS
1. Warm up engine.
2. Check for A/T fluid leakage. B
3. Before driving, A/T fluid level can be checked at A/T fluid tem-
peratures of 30 to 50°C (86 to 122°F) using “COLD” range on A/
T fluid level gauge. AT
a. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
b. Start engine and move selector lever through each gear posi-
tion. Leave selector lever in “P” position. D
c. Check A/T fluid level with engine idling.
SMA827CA
E
d. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and note reading. If level is at low
side of either range, and A/T fluid to the A/T fluid charging pipe.
CAUTION:
F
When wiping away the A/T fluid level gauge, always use
lint-free paper, not a cloth one.
e. Re-insert A/T fluid level gauge into A/T fluid charging pipe as far
as it will go. G
CAUTION:
Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge to the A/T fluid charging
pipe using a stopper attached. H
SMA051D
f. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and note reading. If reading is at
low side of range, add A/T fluid to the A/T fluid charging pipe.
CAUTION: I
Do not overfill.
4. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
5. Recheck A/T fluid level at A/T fluid temperatures of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) using “HOT” range on A/T J
fluid level gauge.
CAUTION:
● When wiping away the A/T fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth one. K
● Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge to the A/T fluid charging pipe using a stopper attached.
6. Check A/T fluid condition.

L
● If A/T fluid is very dark or smells burned, checking operation
of A/T. Flush cooling system after repair of A/T.
● If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.),
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent M
and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-11,
"RADIATOR" , CO-14, "RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)" .
7. Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging
pipe.
CAUTION: SAT638A
Firmly fix the A/T fluid level gauge to the A/T fluid charging
pipe using a stopper attached.

A/T FLUID
Changing A/T Fluid ACS007QT
1. Warm up A/T fluid.

2. Stop engine.
3. Drain A/T fluid from drain plug and refill with new A/T fluid.
Always refill same volume with drained fluid.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
Fluid grade:
NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF),
DEXRONTM III/MERCONTM , or equivalent ATF.
SMA027D
Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS" .
Fluid capacity (With torque converter):

Approx. 8.5 (9 US qt, 7-1/2 lmp qt)
Drain plug
:34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
4. Run engine at idle speed for 5 minutes.

5. Check A/T fluid level and condition. Refer to AT-17, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If A/T fluid is still dirty, repeat
steps 2 through 5.
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ACS008HQ
Whenever an automatic transaxle is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the
radiator must be inspected and cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can con-
taminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case,
malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result.
Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE
1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses.
3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the
steel cooler tubes or bypass valve.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting.
4. Allow any A/T fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into
the oil pan.
SCIA5628E

A/T FLUID
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission

Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out- A
let hose.
CAUTION:
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying B
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
● Avoid contact with eyes and skin. AT

● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis- SCIA5629E
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet D
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet E
hose.
SCIA5630E
H
9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 sec-
onds to force out any remaining fluid.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. I
11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid cooler steel lines to the transaxle.
12. Remove the banjo bolts.
13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transaxle by spraying Transmission Cooler J
Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side
back toward the transaxle for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. K
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.
L
17. Perform AT-19, "A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE" .
A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE: M
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION:
● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying
the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
● Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
● Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis- SCIA5629E
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.

A/T FLUID
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the

cooler inlet hose.
SCIA5631E
6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid
into the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform AT-20, "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCE-
DURE" .
SCIA5632E
A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
a. If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and
the procedure is ended.
SCIA2967E
b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm
(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in
the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/
fluid cooler must be replaced and the inspection procedure is
ended.
SCIA5659E
A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION

After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:31036

A
Cross-Sectional View ACS007JH
AT
SCIA4112E
1. Band servo piston assembly 2. Reverse clutch drum 3. Converter housing

4. Oil pump 5. Brake band 6. Reverse clutch
7. High clutch 8. Front planetary gear 9. Low one-way clutch
10. Rear planetary gear 11. Forward clutch 12. Overrun clutch
13. Low & reverse brake 14. Output gear 15. Idler gear
16. Forward one-way clutch 17. Reduction pinion gear 18. Final gear
19. Differential case 20. Input shaft 21. Torque converter
22. Side cover 23. Transaxle case

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism ACS007JI
CONSTRUCTION
SAT998I
1. Torque converter 2. Oil pump 3. Input shaft

4. Brake band 5. Reverse clutch 6. High clutch
7. Front sun gear 8. Front pinion gear 9. Front internal gear
10. Front planetary carrier 11. Rear sun gear 12. Rear pinion gear
13. Rear internal gear 14. Rear planetary carrier 15. Forward clutch
16. Forward one-way clutch 17. Overrun clutch 18. Low one-way clutch
19. Low & reverse brake 20. Parking pawl 21. Parking gear
22. Output shaft 23. Idler gear 24. Output gear
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE

Clutch and brake components Abbr. Function
5 Reverse clutch R/C To transmit input power to front sun gear 7 .
6 High clutch H/C To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 10 .
15 Forward clutch F/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with forward one-way clutch 16 .
17 Overrun clutch O/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with rear internal gear 13 .
4 Brake band B/B To lock front sun gear 7 .
When forward clutch 15 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear 13 from rotating
16 Forward one-way clutch F/O.C
in opposite direction against engine revolution.
To stop front planetary carrier 10 from rotating in opposite direction against
18 Low one-way clutch L/O.C
engine revolution.
19 Low & reverse brake L & R/B To lock front planetary carrier 10 .

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART

Band servo
A
Shift posi- R/C H/C F/C O/C F/O.C L/O.C L&R/B Lock-
2nd 3rd 4th Remarks
tion 5 6 15 17 16 18 19 up
apply release apply
B
PARK
P
POSITION
REVERSE
R AT
POSITION
NEUTRAL
N
POSITION
D
1st *1D B B
Automatic
2nd *1A B
shift
D*4 E
1⇔2⇔3
3rd *1A *2C C B *1 ⇔4
4th C *3C C F
1st B B
Automatic
2 2nd B shift
1⇔2⇐3 G
3rd *2C C B
1st B B Locks (held

stationary)
H
1 2nd B
in 1st speed
3rd *2C C B 1⇐2⇐3
I
● *1: Operates when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position.
● *2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not con-
tract because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side.
J
● *3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts.
● *4: A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position.
● : Operates. K
● A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake.
● B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
● C: Operates but does not affect power transmission. L
● D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” and “P” Positions
● “N” position
Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft because the clutches do not operate.
● “P” position
Similar to the “N” position, the clutches do not operate. The parking pawl engages with the parking gear to
mechanically hold the output shaft so that the power train is locked.
SAT991I

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“11 ” Position
● Forward clutch As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and
A
● Forward one-way clutch reverse brake.
This is different from that of D1 and 21 .
● Overrun clutch
B
● Low & reverse brake
Engine brake Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when deceler-
ating.
AT
SCIA1816E

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D1 ” and “21 ” Positions

● Forward one-way clutch Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of
● Forward clutch these three clutches.
● Low one-way clutch

D1 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16
Overrun clutch
21 : Always engaged
engagement conditions
At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-
(Engine brake)
way clutch.
SAT377J

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D2 ”, “22 ” and “12 ” Positions

● Forward clutch Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal gear now
A
● Forward one-way rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier.
clutch As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and forward one-
way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier compared with B
● Brake band that of the 1st speed.
Overrun clutch D2 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16
engagement conditions 22 and 12 : Always engaged
AT
SAT378J

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D3 ”, “23 ” and “13 ” Positions

● High clutch Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is con-
● Forward clutch nected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way clutch.
This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier to
● Forward one-way turn at the same speed.
clutch
Overrun clutch D3 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16
engagement conditions 23 and 13 : Always engaged
SCIA7229E

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“D4 ” (OD) Position

● High clutch Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch.
A
● Brake band This front carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and makes
front internal gear (output) turn faster.
● Forward clutch (Does not affect power
transmission) B
At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transaxle line and engine
Engine brake
brake can be obtained when decelerating.
AT
L
SAT380J

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
“R” Position
● Reverse clutch Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake.
● Low & reverse brake Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front
internal gear in the opposite direction.
As there is no one-way clutch in the power transaxle line, engine brake can be
Engine brake
obtained when decelerating.
SAT381J

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
TCM Function ACS007JJ
A
The function of the TCM is to:
● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. B
● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always AT
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SWITCHES & SENSORS TCM ACTUATORS
D
PNP switch
Shift control
Accelerator pedal position (APP)
Line pressure control
sensor Shift solenoid valve A
Lock-up control
Closed throttle position signal
Overrun clutch control
Shift solenoid valve B E
Wide open throttle position signal Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Timing control
Engine speed signal Torque converter clutch solenoid
Fail-safe control
A/T fluid temperature sensor valve
Self-diagnosis
Revolution sensor Line pressure solenoid valve F
CONSULT-II communication line
Vehicle speed sensor O/D OFF indicator lamp
control
Overdrive control switch signal
Duet-EU control
Stop lamp switch signal
G
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
M
SCIA5482E

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication ACS007JK
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. For details, refer to LAN-16,
"CAN Communication Unit" .
Input/Output Signal of TCM ACS007JL
Line Vehicle Engine Fail-safe Self-diag-

Shift Lock-up
Control item pressure speed brake function nostics
control control
control control control (*3) function
Accelerator pedal position signal X X X X X X X
Vehicle speed sensor A/T
X X X X X X
(Revolution sensor)
Vehicle speed sensor MTR(*1) X X X X X
Closed throttle position signal(*5) (*2) X (*2) X X (*4) X
Input Wide open throttle position signal(*5) (*2) X (*2) X (*4) X

Engine speed signal X X
PNP switch X X X X X X (*4) X
Stop lamp switch signal(*5) X X X (*4) X

A/T fluid temperature sensors X X X X X
TCM power supply voltage signal X X
Shift solenoid valve A/B X X X
Line pressure solenoid X X X
Out- Torque converter clutch solenoid
X X X
put valve
Overrun clutch solenoid valve X X X X
(*6) X
O/D OFF indicator lamp
*1: Spare for vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor)
*2: Spare for accelerator pedal position signal
*3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function.
*4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error.
*5: Input by CAN communications.
*6: Output by CAN communications.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Line Pressure Control ACS007JM
A
● TCM has various line pressure control characteristics to match the driving conditions.
● An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve based on TCM characteristics.
● Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically controlled through the line pressure solenoid B
valve to accommodate engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation.
NORMAL CONTROL
The characteristics of line pressure to throttle opening. AT
SAT003J F
BACK-UP CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE)
If the selector lever is shifted to “2” position while driving in D4 , D3
G
great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the transaxle. Clutch
operating pressure (line pressure) must be increased to deal with
this driving force.
H
SAT004J
J
DURING SHIFT CHANGE
The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a change
in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift solenoid K
valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting shock.
SCIA4828E

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
AT LOW FLUID TEMPERATURE

● Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing change with fluid temperature. Clutch
engaging or band-contacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid temperature, to stabilize
shifting quality.
● The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent
shifting shock due to low viscosity of A/T fluid when temperature
is low.
SCIA4829E
● Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the

throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to −10°C (14°F).
This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and
brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low
temperature.
SCIA4830E
Shift Control ACS007JN
The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate vehicle speed and varying engine opera-
tions. This is accomplished by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and the ECM (accelerator
pedal position sensor). This results in improved acceleration performance and fuel economy.
CONTROL OF SHIFT SOLENOID VALVES A AND B
The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to sig-
nals from the accelerator pedal position sensor and revolution sen-
sor to select the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift
schedule memorized in the TCM.
The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When
set to “ON”, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to
the shift valve.
SAT008J
RELATION BETWEEN SHIFT SOLENOID VALVES A AND B AND GEAR POSITIONS

Gear position 1 2 3 4
Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open)

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTROL OF SHIFT VALVES A AND B

A
AT
SAT009J D
Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves A and B is applied to the end face of shift
valves A and B.
The figure above shows the operation of shift valve B. When the shift solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure E
applied to the end face of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward.
Lock-Up Control ACS007JO
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked to eliminate torque converter slip to F
increase power transmission efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty signal sent from
the TCM. The signal is converted to an oil pressure signal which controls the torque converter clutch piston.
CONDITIONS FOR LOCK-UP OPERATION G
When vehicle is driven in 3rd and 4th gear positions, vehicle speed and throttle opening are detected. If the
detected values fall within the lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed.
H
Overdrive control switch ON OFF
Selector lever “D” position
Gear position D4 D3 I
Vehicle speed sensor More than set value
Throttle position sensor Less than set opening
J
Closed throttle position switch OFF
A/T fluid temperature sensor More than 40°C (104°F)
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL K

Lock-Up Control System Diagram
L
SCIA5623E

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Lock-Up Released
● In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by
draining the torque converter clutch piston applying pressure and the torque converter clutch piston
release pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-Up Applied
● In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by gener-
ating the torque converter clutch piston applying pressure and the torque converter clutch piston release
pressure is drained.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
Half-Clutched State
● The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up applying pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is
put into half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston applying pressure is increased and the
coupling is completed smoothly.
Engine Brake Control (Overrun Clutch Control) ACS007JP
Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in downshifting operations. This clutch transmits
engine torque to the wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to the engine because
the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the engine brake is not effective.
The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed.
OVERRUN CLUTCH OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCIA5658E
Selector lever position Gear position Throttle opening

“D” position D1 , D2 , D3 gear position Less than 3/16
“2” position 21 , 22 gear position
At any position
“1” position 11 , 12 gear position

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL

The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF signal A
transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control (engine
brake control).
When this solenoid valve is “ON”, the pilot pressure drain port B
closes. When it is “OFF”, the drain port opens.
During the solenoid valve “ON” pilot pressure is applied to the end
face of the overrun clutch control valve.
AT
SAT015J
D
OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE OPERATION

When the solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure is applied to the E
overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch con-
trol valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch does
not engage.
When the solenoid valve is “OFF”, pilot pressure is not generated. At F
this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by
spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is pro-
vided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the overrun G
clutch to engage.
In the “2” and “1” positions, the overrun clutch control valve remains
pushed down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times.
H
K
SCIA5643E

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Control Valve ACS007JQ
FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVES

Valve name Function
Pressure regulator valve, plug and sleeve Regulates oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all driv-
plug ing conditions.
Pressure modifier valve and sleeve Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates pres-
sure-modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for all
driving conditions.
Pilot valve Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls lock-up
mechanism, overrun clutch, shift timing.
Accumulator control valve Regulates accumulator back-pressure to pressure suited to driving conditions.
Manual valve Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions.
Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral.
Shift valve A Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve A
to meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and upshifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th →
3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B.
Shift valve B Simultaneously switches two oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve B in
relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and upshifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th →
3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A.
Overrun clutch control valve Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously
with application of the brake band in D4 . (Interlocking occurs if the overrun clutch
engages during D4 .)
1st reducing valve Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when downshift-
ing from the 1st position 12 to 11 .
Overrun clutch reducing valve Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock.
In the 1st and 2nd positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to
increase the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability.
Torque converter relief valve Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure.
Torque converter clutch control valve, plug Activates or inactivates the lock-up function.
and sleeve Also provides smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up
system.
1-2 accumulator valve and piston Lessens the shock find when the 2nd gear band servo contracts, and provides smooth
shifting.
3-2 timing valve Switches the pace that oil pressure is released depending on vehicle speed; maximizes
the high clutch release timing, and allows for soft downshifting.
Shuttle valve Determines if the overrun clutch solenoid valve should control the 3-2 timing valve or the
overrun clutch control valve and switches between the two.
Cooler check valve At low speeds and with a small load when a little heat is generated, saves the volume of
cooler flow, and stores the oil pressure for lock-up.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028

A
Introduction ACS007QU
A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination with B
the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the
ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, AT
refer to AT-82, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
OBD-II Function for A/T System ACS007QV
D
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a E
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts. F
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ACS007QW
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

G
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC H
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, I
the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd trip
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
J
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ACS007QX
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. K
( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc.
These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
L
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. How-
ever, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring
M
or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-II (if available) is recom-
mended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown
on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed
in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven
after the last detection of a DTC.
SAT014K

If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
SAT015K
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
SAT016K
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data

The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-123, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
● If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-48, "Emission-Related Diagnostic Information" .
● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data

● System readiness test (SRT) codes A
● Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II) B
● If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. AT
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice. D
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
E
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
SCIA5586E
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)

seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-91, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to
erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-136, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" .

HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)

The O/D OFF indicator lamp is located on the combination meter.
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-91, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to
erase the DTC.)
3. Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No tools)”. Refer to EC-60, "How to Erase DTC" .
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ACS007QY
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
● If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-25, "WARNING
LAMPS" , or see EC-659, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNEC-
TOR" .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
● If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004

A
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ACS007JR
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart. B
NOTE:
If DTC “U1000” is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “DTC U1000 CAN
COMMUNICATION”. Refer to AT-95 . AT
Priority Detected items
1 CAN communication line
2 Except above D
Fail-Safe ACS008HS
The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major E
electrical input/output device circuit is damaged.
Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of “1”, “2” or “D”. The cus-
tomer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration. F
When the ignition switch is turned ON following Fail-Safe operation, O/D OFF indicator lamp blinks for about 8
seconds. Refer to AT-91, "Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II" .
The blinking of the O/D OFF indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be cleared. The
customer may resume normal driving conditions. G
Always follow the “WORK FLOW”, refer to AT-45, "WORK FLOW" .
The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows:
● The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor. H
● During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
I
● The following fail-safe functions allow vehicles to be driven even when sensor, switch or solenoid malfunc-
tion occurs.
Vehicle Speed Sensor 1 (Revolution Sensor) J
● Vehicle speed sensor 2 signal is input from combination meter.
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Signal
K
● If the accelerator pedal position sensor from ECM to TCM outputs an erratic signal, the control unit
detects the throttle position by the closed throttle position signal and wide-open throttle position signal
sent via the CAN communication from ECM.
If an unexpected signal is sent from the accelerator pedal position sensor to ECM, ECM controls engine to L
maintain vehicle operation.
Closed throttle position signal Wide open throttle position signal Throttle position
M
– ON 4/8
OFF OFF 2/8
ON OFF 0/8

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch

● When the multiple PNP switch signals are input to TCM, the priority of selector lever position becomes
“D”, “N”, “R”, “2” and “1” in order by internal TCM determination.
The use of 4th gear is inhibited until normal operation resumes. Because the hydraulic circuit of the con-
trol valve is switched by manual valve according to the selector lever position, however, actual operating
condition of vehicle becomes as follows.
Actual lever position PNP switch input signal Running status
“P” “P” position and other position signals P
“R” “R” position and other position signals R
“N” “N” position and other position signals N
“D” “D” position and other position signals D1 ⇔D2 ⇔D3 ⇔D4
“2” position and other position signals (Except “1” position) 21 ⇔22 ⇔23
“2”
“2” position and “1” position signals 21 ⇔22
“1” position and other position signals (Except “2” position) 11 ⇔12 ⇔13
“1”
“1” position and “2” position signals 11 ⇔12
Shift Solenoid Valve A and B

● If non-standard solenoid signal is sent to TCM, use of certain gears is limited. Refer to chart shown below.
Malfunction in solenoid Malfunction in solenoid Malfunction in solenoid
Normal
Shift position valve A valve B valves A and B
A B Gear A B Gear A B Gear A B Gear
● ● 1st – ●→× ●→× – – –
× ● 2nd – ●→× × – – –
“D” position
× × 3rd – x × – – –
● × 4th – x ●→× – – –
● ● 1st – ●→× ●→× – – –
3rd 3rd 3rd
“2” position × ● 2nd – ●→× × – – –
× × 3rd – x × – – –
● ● 1st – ●→× ●→× – – –
“1” position × ● 2nd – ●→× × – – –
× × 3rd – x × – – –
●: Solenoid ON
×: Solenoid OFF
–: Non-standard condition
Line Pressure Solenoid Valve

● If non-standard solenoid signal is sent to TCM, line pressure solenoid valve is turned OFF to achieve max-
imum oil pressure.
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
● If non-standard solenoid signal is sent to TCM, torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF to
release lock-up.
Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve
● If non-standard solenoid signal is sent to TCM, overrun clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF to engage
overrun clutch. This will result in more effective engine brake during deceleration.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair ACS007JT
INTRODUCTION A
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, accelera-
tor pedal position sensor or PNP switch and provides shift control or
lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves. B
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good oper-
ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunc-
AT
tion, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a malfunction that occurs inter-
mittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent malfunctions are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, D
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
SAT631IA
ment of good parts.
A visual check only, may not find the cause of the malfunctions. A E
road test with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be
performed. Follow the AT-45, "WORK FLOW" .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a drivability complaint. The customer F
can supply good information about such malfunctions, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET” like the G
example (AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" ) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot drivability malfunctions on an electroni-
cally controlled engine vehicle.
SAT632I
H
Also check related Service bulletins for information.
K
SEF234G
WORK FLOW
L
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In
general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms
or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, AT-47, "Information from Customer" and AT-48, "Diagnostic Work- M
sheet" , to perform the best troubleshooting possible.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Work Flow Chart
SAT086JI
*1 AT-47 *2 AT-48 *3 AT-9

*4 AT-17 *5 AT-52, AT-55 *6 AT-57
*7 AT-80 *8 AT-39 *9 AT-42
*10 AT-95 *11 AT-200 *12 AT-205
*13 AT-244 *14 AT-67 *15 AT-40
*16 AT-95 *17 AT-200 *18 EC-48

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information from Customer A
KEY POINTS
● WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T models
B
● WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
● WHERE..... Road conditions
● HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms AT
Customer name MR./MS Model & Year VIN
Trans. model Engine Mileage
D
Malfunction Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency ❏ Continuous ❏ Intermittent (times a day)
Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. (❏ Any position ❏ Particular position) E
❏ No up-shift (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 3rd ❏ 3rd → O/D)
❏ No down-shift (❏ O/D → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st)
❏ Lockup malfunction F
❏ Shift point too high or too low.
❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏N→R ❏ Lockup ❏ Any drive position)
G
❏ Noise or vibration
❏ No kick down
❏ No pattern select H
❏ Others
( )
Blinks for about 8 seconds. I
❏ Continuously lit ❏ No lit
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ❏ Continuously lit ❏ No lit J

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Worksheet
1. ❏ Read the Fail-safe and listen to customer complaints. AT-43, AT-47
2. ❏ Check A/T fluid AT-17
❏ Leakage (Follow specified procedure)
❏ Fluid condition
❏ Fluid level
3. ❏ Perform “STALL TEST” and “LINE PRESSURE TEST”. AT-52,
AT-55
❏ “STALL TEST” — Mark possible damaged components/others.
❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ Low & reverse brake
❏ Reverse clutch ❏ Low one-way clutch
❏ Forward clutch ❏ Engine
❏ Overrun clutch ❏ Line pressure is low
❏ Forward one-way clutch ❏ Clutches and brakes except high clutch and
brake band are OK
❏ “LINE PRESSURE TEST” — Suspected parts:
4. ❏ Perform “Road Test”. AT-57
4-1. “Check Before Engine is Started” AT-57
❏ AT-205, "O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" .
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items. AT-82 , AT-91 .
❏ AT-95, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
❏ AT-98, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" .
❏ AT-104, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" .
❏ AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .
❏ AT-120, "DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-125, "DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-130, "DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-135, "DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-142, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-147, "DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)" .
❏ AT-155, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-162, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" .
❏ AT-167, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" .
❏ AT-172, "DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR" .
❏ AT-177, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-182, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
❏ AT-187, "DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)" .
❏ AT-194, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-198, "DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)" .
❏ AT-200, "DTC CONTROL UNIT(EEPROM)" .

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. 4-2. “Check at Idle” AT-58

A
❏ AT-207, "Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” and “N” Position" .
❏ AT-208, "In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed" .
❏ AT-209, "In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" .
❏ AT-211, "Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position" . B
❏ AT-212, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position" .
❏ AT-215, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D”, “2” or “1” Position" .
4-3. “Cruise Test” AT-60
AT
Part 1
❏ AT-217, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
❏ AT-220, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . D
❏ AT-223, "A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .
❏ AT-228, "A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up" .
❏ AT-229, "A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition" . E
❏ AT-231, "Lock-Up Is Not Released" .
❏ AT-232, "Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" .
Part 2 AT-63
F
❏ AT-217, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
❏ AT-220, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" .
❏ AT-226, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . G
Part 3 AT-64
❏ AT-234, "A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”" .
❏ AT-235, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position" . H
❏ AT-237, "A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever “2” → “1” on Position" .
❏ AT-240, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake" .
❏ Perform self-diagnostics. Enter checks for detected items. AT-82 , AT-91 .
I
❏ AT-95, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
❏ AT-98, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" .
❏ AT-104, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" . J
❏ AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .
❏ AT-120, "DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-125, "DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-130, "DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION" .
K
❏ AT-135, "DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION" .
❏ AT-142, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-147, "DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)" . L
❏ AT-155, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-162, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" .
❏ AT-167, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" .
❏ AT-172, "DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR" . M
❏ AT-177, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
❏ AT-182, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
❏ AT-187, "DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)" .
❏ AT-194, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
❏ AT-198, "DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)" .
❏ AT-200, "DTC CONTROL UNIT(EEPROM)" .
5. ❏ For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts. AT-260
6. ❏ Perform “Road Test”. AT-57
7. ❏ Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged parts. AT-82, AT-91
Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible
symptoms and the component inspection orders.)
8. AT-40, EC-
❏ Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories.
60

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location ACS007JU
SCIA5367E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram ACS007JV
AT
TCWB0006E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Inspections before Trouble Diagnosis ACS007JW
A/T FLUID CHECK

Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check
● Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to AT-17, "Checking A/T Fluid" .
Fluid Condition Check
Inspect the fluid condition.
Conceivable
Fluid status Required Operation
Cause
Replace the A/T fluid and check the
Varnished (viscous Clutch, brake A/T main unit and the vehicle for
varnish state) scorched malfunctions (wire harnesses,
cooler pipes, etc.)
Replace the A/T fluid and check for
Milky white or cloudy Water in the fluid
places where water is getting in.
Unusual wear of
Large amount of metal Replace the A/T fluid and check for
sliding parts SAT638A
powder mixed in improper operation of the A/T.
within A/T
STALL TEST
Stall Test Procedure
1. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and
oil.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 10 minutes or until fluid and oil
reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
SAT647B
3. Set parking brake and block wheels.

4. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
● It is good practice to mark the point of specified engine
rpm on indicator.
SAT513G
5. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D”
position.
SAT775B

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6. Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot

brake. A
7. Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately release
throttle.
● During test, do not hold throttle wide open for more than B
5 seconds.
Stall revolution: 2,300 - 2,750 rpm
AT
SAT514G
D
8. Move selector lever to “N” position.
9. Cool off ATF.
● Run engine at idle for at least 1 minute. E
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in “2”, “1” and “R”
positions.
F
G
SAT771B
Judgement of Stall Test

The test result and possible damaged components relating to each result are shown in the illustrations on next H
page.
In order to pinpoint the possible damaged components, refer to AT-46, "Work Flow Chart" .
NOTE: I
Stall revolution is too high in “D”, “2”, or “1” position:
● Slippage occurs in 1st gear but not in 2nd and 3rd gears. ..... Low one-way clutch slippage
● Slippage occurs in the following gears: J
1st through 3rd gears in “D” position and engine brake functions with overdrive control switch set to OFF.
1st and 2nd gears in “2” position and engine brake functions with accelerator pedal released (fully closed
throttle)...... Forward clutch or forward one-way clutch slippage K
Stall revolution is too high in “R” position:
● Engine brake does not function in “1” position. ..... Low & reverse brake slippage
● Engine brake functions in “1” position. ..... Reverse clutch slippage L
Stall revolution within specifications:
● Vehicle does not achieve speed of more than 80 km/h (50 MPH). ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque
converter housing M
CAUTION:
Be careful since automatic fluid temperature increases abnormally.
● Slippage occurs in 3rd and 4th gears in “D” position. ..... High clutch slippage
● Slippage occurs in 2nd and 4th gears in “D” position. ..... Brake band slippage
● Engine brake does not function in 2nd and 3rd gears in “D” position, 2nd gear in “2” position, and 1st gear
in “1” position with overdrive control switch set to OFF. ..... Overrun clutch slippage
Stall revolution less than specifications:
● Poor acceleration during starts. ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SCIA0707E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
LINE PRESSURE TEST

Line Pressure Test Ports A
Location of line pressure test ports are shown in the figure.
● Always replace pressure plugs as they are self-sealing
bolts. B
AT
D
SCIA0709E
Line Pressure Test Procedure E

1. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid or
oil.
2. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF F
reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature: 50 - 80°C (122 -176°F)
G
H
SAT647B
3. Install oil pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port.

I
SCIA5523E
L
4. Set parking brake and block wheels.
● Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure
test is being performed at stall speed. M
SAT513G

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed.
● When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the
stall test procedure.
SAT493G
Line Pressure
Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)
Engine speed rpm
“D”, “2” and “1” positions “R” position
Idle 500 (5.1, 73) 778 (7.9, 113)
Stall 1,233 (12.6, 179) 1,918 (19.6, 278)
Judgement of Line Pressure Test

Judgement Suspected parts
Line pressure is low in all positions. ● Oil pump wear
● Control piston damage
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
● Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged
● Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve
● Clogged strainer
Line pressure is low in particular posi- ● Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch
tion. ● For example, line pressure is:
− Low in “R” and “1” positions, but
At idle − Normal in “D” and “2” positions.
Therefore, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit.
Refer to AT-23, "CLUTCH AND BAND CHART" .
Line pressure is high. ● Maladjustment of throttle position sensor
● A/T fluid temperature sensor damaged
● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
● Pressure modifier valve sticking
● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
● Open in dropping resistor circuit
Line pressure is low. ● Maladjustment of throttle position sensor
● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
At stall ● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
speed ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
● Pressure modifier valve sticking
● Pilot valve sticking

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Road Test ACS007JX
DESCRIPTION A
● The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of A/
T and analyze causes of malfunctions.
● The road test consists of the following three parts: B
1. Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-57 .
2. Check at idle. Refer to AT-58 .
AT
3. Cruise test
● Inspection all the item from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-60 ,
AT-63 and AT-64 .
D
SAT786A
● Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures and E
items to check.
● Perform tests on all items until specified symptom is found.
Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test. F
Refer to the following.
Refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM"
and AT-202, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS" .
G
SAT496G H
Check before Engine Is Started ACS007JY
1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP I

1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
J
3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 5 seconds.
SCIA5472E
M
4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)

Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
YES >> 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.
Refer to AT-82, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
MODE" , AT-91, "Diagnostic Procedure Without CON-
SULT-II" .
3. Go to AT-58, "Check at Idle" .
NO >> Stop “Road Test”. Go to AT-205, "O/D OFF Indicator
Lamp Does Not Come On" . SCIA5468E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Check at Idle ACS007JZ
1. CHECK ENGINE START

3. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn ignition switch START position.
Is engine started?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> ● Stop “Road Test”. Mark the box on the “DIAGNOSTIC
WORKSHEET”. Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-207, "Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” and
“N” Position" .
SAT769B
2. CHECK ENGINE START

2. Move selector lever to “R”, “D”, “2” or “1” position.
3. Turn ignition switch START position.
Is engine started?
YES >> ● Stop “Road Test”. Mark the box on the “DIAGNOSTIC
WORKSHEET”. Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-207, "Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” and
“N” Position" .
● Continue “Road Test”.
NO >> GO TO 3.
SAT770B
3. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Release parking brake.
SAT768B
4. Push vehicle forward or backward.

Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backyard?
YES >> ● Mark the box on the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”.
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-208, "In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves For-
ward or Backward When Pushed" .
NO >> GO TO 4.
SAT796A

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE A

1. Apply parking brake.
2. Start engine.
3. Move selector lever to “N” position. B
4. Release parking brake.
Does vehicle move forward or backward?
AT
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-209, "In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" .
D
NO >> GO TO 5.
E
SAT771B
5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK

F
1. Apply foot brake.
I
SAT797A
2. Move selector lever to “R” position. J

Is there large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position?
Refer to AT-47 . K
● GO TO AT-211, "Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position" .
NO >> GO TO 6. L
SAT772B M

Release foot brake for several seconds.
Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> ● Mark the box on the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”.
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-212, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward
in “R” Position" .
SAT799A

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Move selector lever to “D”, “2” and “1” positions and check if vehicle
creeps forward.
Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions?
YES >> Go to AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" .
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-215, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in
“D”, “2” or “1” Position" .
SAT773B
Cruise Test — Part 1 ACS007K0
1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION

1. Drive vehicle for approximately 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
3. Set overdrive control switch to ON position.
5. Start engine.
SAT768B
6. Move selector lever to “D” position.
SAT775B
7. Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal

half-way.
Read gear position. Refer to AT-84, "DATA MONITOR
MODE" .
Does vehicle start from D1 ?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-217, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1"
. SAT495G

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK SHIFT-UP (D1 TO D2 ) A

Check shift-up (D1 to D2 ).
Specified speed when shifting from D1 to D2. Refer to AT-66, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. B
Refer to AT-84, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does A/T shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed?
YES >> GO TO 3. AT
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-220, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or D
Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" .
SAT954I E
3. CHECK SHIFT-UP (D2 TO D3 )
Check shift-up (D2 to D3 ). F

Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3. Refer to AT-66, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Refer to AT-84, "DATA MONITOR MODE" . G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> ● Mark the box on the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”. H
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-223, "A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .

I
SAT955I
J
Check shift-up (D3 to D4 ).

Specified speed when shifting from D3 to D4. Refer to AT-66, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" . K
L
YES >> GO TO 5.
Refer to AT-47 . M
SAT956I

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. CHECK LOCK-UP (D4 TO D4 L/U)
Check lock-up (D4 to D4 L/U).

Specified speed when lock-up occurs. Refer to AT-66, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Lock-
Up" .
Read vehicle speed, throttle opening when lock-up duty
becomes 94%. Refer to AT-84, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
YES >> GO TO 6.
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-228, "A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up" .
SAT957I
6. CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD

Check lock-up hold.
When lock-up duty becomes 94%. Refer to AT-84, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> ● Mark the box on the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”. Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-229, "A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition" .
7. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN (D4 L/U TO D4 )

Release accelerator pedal.
When lock-up duty becomes 4%. Refer to AT-84, "DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> ● Mark the box on the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”. Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-231, "Lock-Up Is Not Released" .
8. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN (D4 TO D3 )
Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly.

Read gear position and engine speed. Refer to AT-84, "DATA
MONITOR MODE" .
Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from
D4 to D3 ?
YES >> 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to AT-63, "Cruise Test — Part 2" .
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-232, "Engine Speed Does Not Return to SAT959I
Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" .


TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION A
1. Confirm gear selector lever is in “D” position.

2. Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again. B
Read gear position. Refer to AT-84, "DATA MONITOR
MODE" .
Does vehicle start from D1 ? AT
YES >> GO TO 2.
Refer to AT-47 . D
● GO TO AT-217, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1"
.
● Continue “Road Test”. SAT495G
E
2. CHECK SHIFT-UP AND SHIFT-DOWN (D3 TO D4 TO D2 )

F
1. Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in the figure.
2. Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully.
Read gear position and throttle opening. Refer to AT-84, G
"DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does A/T shift from D4 to D2 as soon as accelerator pedal is
depressed fully? H
YES >> GO TO 3.
Refer to AT-47 .
I
● GO TO AT-220, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or
Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . SAT404H

J
Check shift-up (D2 to D3 ) K

Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3 . Refer to AT-66, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
Refer to AT-84, "DATA MONITOR MODE" . L
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> ● Mark the box on the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”. M
Refer to AT-47 .
SAT960I

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK SHIFT-UP (D3 TO D4 ) AND ENGINE BRAKE
Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D2 to D3 .

Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 and does vehicle decelerate by engine
brake?
2. Go to AT-64, "Cruise Test — Part 3" .
Refer to AT-47 .
SAT405H
1. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN (D4 TO 33 )
1. Confirm overdrive control switch is ON position.

2. Confirm gear selector lever is in “D” position.
3. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D4 .
SAT812A
4. Release accelerator pedal.
SAT813A
5. Set overdrive control switch to OFF position while driving in D4 .

Read gear position and vehicle speed. Refer to AT-84,
"DATA MONITOR MODE" .
Does A/T shift from D4 to D3 (O/D OFF)?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-234, "A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When
Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”" .
● Continue “Road Test”. SCIA5469E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE A

Check engine brake.
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
YES >> GO TO 3. B
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-240, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by AT
Engine Brake" .
D
SCIA5469E
3. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN (D3 TO 22 ) E
Move selector lever from “D” to “2” position while driving in D3 (O/D
OFF).
F
Read gear position. Refer to AT-84, "DATA MONITOR MODE"
.
Does A/T shift from D3 (O/D OFF) to 22 ?
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
Refer to AT-47 .
H
● GO TO AT-235, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When
Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position" . SAT791GA

I
4. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Check engine brake. J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> ● Mark the box on the “DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET”. K
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-240, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by
Engine Brake" . L
SAT791GA M
5. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN (22 TO 11 )
Move selector lever from “2” to “1” position while driving in 22 .

Read gear position. Refer to AT-84, "DATA MONITOR MODE"
.
Does A/T shift from 22 to 11 position?
YES >> GO TO 6.
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-237, "A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When
Selector Lever “2” → “1” on Position" .
● Continue “Road Test”. SAT778B

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE

Check engine brake.
2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-82, "SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC RESULT MODE" , AT-91, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure Without CONSULT-II" .
Refer to AT-47 .
● GO TO AT-240, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by
Engine Brake" . SAT778B
● Stop “Road Test”.
Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ACS007K3
Throttle posi- Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Shift pattern
tion D1 → D2 D2 → D 3 D3 → D4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1
57 - 65 107 - 115 167 - 175 163 - 171 97 - 105 41 - 49
Comfort
(35 - 40) (66 - 71) (104 - 109) (101 - 106) (60 - 65) (25 - 30)
Full throttle
57 - 65 107 - 115 167 - 175 163 - 171 97 - 105 41 - 49
Auto power
(35 - 40) (66 - 71) (104 - 109) (101 - 106) (60 - 65) (25 - 30)
36 - 44 71 - 79 131 - 139 77 - 85 38 - 46 5 - 13
Comfort
(22 - 27) (44 - 49) (81 - 86) (48 - 53) (23 - 28) (3 - 8)
Half throttle
42 - 50 79 - 87 131 - 139 77 - 85 45 - 53 5 - 13
Auto power
(26 - 31) (49 - 54) (81 - 86) (48 - 53) (28 - 33) (3 - 8)
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Lock-Up ACS007K4
Vehicle speed
Overdrive control switch km/h (MPH)
Throttle position Shift pattern
(Shift position)
Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF”
Comfort 61 - 69 (38 - 43) 51 - 59 (31 - 36)
1/8 ON [D4 ]
Power 61 - 69 (38 - 43) 51 - 59 (31 - 36)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Chart ACS007K5
Numbers are arranged in order of inspection. A

Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.
Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic item Reference page
1. Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor AT-172 B
2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
AT-109, AT-182
and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
3. Engine speed signal AT-115 AT
Torque converter ON vehicle 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-104
is not locked up. 5. Line pressure test AT-55
D
6. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-142
7. Control valve assembly AT-260
OFF vehicle 8. Torque converter AT-280 E
1. Fluid level AT-17
No Lock-up
2. Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor AT-172
Engagement/
F
TCC Inoperative 3. Line pressure test AT-55
Torque converter ON vehicle
clutch piston slip.
5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-155 G
OFF vehicle 7. Torque converter AT-280
1. Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor AT-172 H
Lock-up point is 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)

AT-109, AT-182
extremely high or ON vehicle and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
low. I
1. Engine idle speed EC-75 J
3. Line pressure test AT-55
4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-104 K
Sharp shock in ON vehicle
Shift Shock shifting from “N” 5. Engine speed signal AT-115
to “D” position.
6. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-155
L
8. Accumulator N-D AT-260
OFF vehicle 9. Forward clutch AT-331 M

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Too sharp a ON vehicle 3. Accumulator servo release AT-260
shock in change
from D1 to D2 . 4. Control valve assembly AT-260
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-104
OFF vehicle 6. Brake band AT-352
ON vehicle 2. Line pressure test AT-55
Too sharp a
shock in change 3. Control valve assembly AT-260
from D2 to D3 .
4. High clutch AT-325
OFF vehicle
5. Brake band AT-352
Shift Shock
Too sharp a 3. Control valve assembly AT-260
shock in change
from D3 to D4 . 4. Brake band AT-352
OFF vehicle 5. Overrun clutch AT-331
6. Forward one-way clutch AT-342
Gear change 1. Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor AT-172

shock felt during 2. Line pressure test AT-55
deceleration by ON vehicle
releasing acceler- 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-177
ator pedal. 4. Control valve assembly AT-260
Large shock ON vehicle 1. Control valve assembly AT-260
changing from 12
to 11 in “1” posi- OFF vehicle 2. Low & reverse brake AT-338
tion.
Too high a gear
change point from 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
AT-109, AT-182
D1 to D2 , from ON vehicle and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
D2 to D3 , from 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162
D3 to D4 .
4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-167
Gear change ON vehicle
directly from D1 2. Accumulator servo release AT-260
to D3 occurs.
Improper Shift
Timing Too high a 1. Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor AT-172
change point from
D4 to D3 , from ON vehicle 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
D3 to D 2 , from AT-109, AT-182
D2 to D1 .
Kickdown does 1. Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor AT-172

not operate when 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
depressing pedal AT-109, AT-182
ON vehicle and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
in D4 within kick-
down vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162
speed. 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-167

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A
Kickdown oper- 1. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
AT-109, AT-182
ates or engine and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
overruns when
depressing pedal ON vehicle B
in D4 beyond 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162
kickdown vehicle
speed limit. 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-167
Improper Shift
Timing Gear change 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-264
AT
from 22 to 23 in
ON vehicle
“2” position. 2. Control cable adjustment AT-252
D
Gear change 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-264
from 11 to 12 in ON vehicle
“1” position. 2. Control cable adjustment AT-252
E
3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-177 F
ON vehicle
Failure to change 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162
gear from D4 to
D3 . 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-155
G
OFF vehicle
8. Overrun clutch AT-331 H
Failure to change ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162
I
gear from D3 to
No Down Shift 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-167
D2 or from D4 to
D2 . 5. Control valve assembly AT-260 J
OFF vehicle
1. Fluid level AT-17 K
ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162
Failure to change L
gear from D2 to 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-167
D1 or from D3 to 5. Control valve assembly AT-260
D1 .
6. Low one-way clutch AT-280 M
OFF vehicle 7. High clutch AT-325

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Failure to change
from D3 to 22 2. Shift solenoid valve B AT-167
when changing ON vehicle
lever into “2” posi-
tion. 4. Control cable adjustment AT-252
AT-235
1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-264
No Down Shift 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
AT-109, AT-182
ON vehicle
Does not change 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162
from 12 to 11 in
“1” position.
5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-177
6. Overrun clutch AT-331
OFF vehicle
7. Low & reverse brake AT-338
1. Control cable adjustment AT-252
2. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162
Failure to change 3. Control valve assembly AT-260
gear from D1 to ON vehicle
D2 . 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
AT-109, AT-182
No Up Shift
Failure to change ON vehicle
gear from D2 to 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
AT-109, AT-182
D3 . and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
OFF vehicle

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A
2. Overdrive control switch AT-249
3. Control cable adjustment AT-252 B
Failure to change ON vehicle 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162
gear from D3 to
D4 . 5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
AT-109, AT-182
and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT
D
No Up Shift
3. Overdrive control switch AT-249 E
4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
AT-109, AT-182
A/T does not shift
ON vehicle
to D4 when driv- 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162 F
ing with over-
drive control
switch ON. 7. Control valve assembly AT-260
G

10. Brake band AT-352 H
OFF vehicle
2. Stall test AT-52 I
Vehicle will not ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-55
run in “R” position
(but runs in “D”, 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-155
J
“2” and “1” posi- 5. Control valve assembly AT-260
tions). Clutch
slips. 6. Reverse clutch AT-320
Slips/Will Not Very poor accel- 7. High clutch AT-325 K
Engage eration.
OFF vehicle 8. Forward clutch AT-331
L
Vehicle will not ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-252
run in “D” and “2”
positions (but
M
runs in “1” and OFF vehicle 2. Low one-way clutch AT-280
“R” positions).

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

2. Stall test AT-52
Vehicle will not ON vehicle
run in “D”, “1”, “2”
positions (but 5. Control valve assembly AT-260
runs in “R” posi-
6. Accumulator N-D AT-260
tion). Clutch slips.
Very poor accel- 7. Reverse clutch AT-320
eration.
OFF vehicle 9. Forward clutch AT-331
10. Forward one-way clutch AT-331
11. Low one-way clutch AT-280
Clutches or 6. Control valve assembly AT-260
brakes slip some-
Slips/Will Not what in starting. 7. Accumulator N-D AT-260
Engage
8. Forward clutch AT-331
9. Reverse clutch AT-320
OFF vehicle 10. Low & reverse brake AT-338
11. Oil pump AT-299
12. Torque converter AT-280
No creep at all. 3. Control valve assembly AT-260

AT-212, AT-215 4. Forward clutch AT-331
OFF vehicle 5. Oil pump AT-299
Almost no shock
or clutches slip- ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-55
ping in change 4. Accumulator servo release AT-260
from D1 to D2 .

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A
Almost no shock ON vehicle
or slipping in 3. Line pressure test AT-55 B
change from D2 4. Control valve assembly AT-260
to D3 .
OFF vehicle AT
Almost no shock 2. Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor AT-172
ON vehicle D
or slipping in
change from D3
to D4 . 4. Control valve assembly AT-260
OFF vehicle 5. Brake band AT-352 E
F
Races extremely 3. Line pressure test AT-55
ON vehicle
fast or slips in 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-155
changing from D4
to D3 when 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162 G
depressing pedal. 6. Control valve assembly AT-260
Slips/Will Not
Engage 7. Brake band AT-352
OFF vehicle H
2. Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor AT-172 I
Races extremely
ON vehicle 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-155
fast or slips in
changing from D4 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162
J
to D2 when
depressing pedal.
K
OFF vehicle
1. Fluid level AT-17 L

ON vehicle M
fast or slips in 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-155
changing from D3
to D2 when 5. Shift solenoid valve B AT-167
depressing pedal. 6. Control valve assembly AT-260
OFF vehicle

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS


fast or slips in ON vehicle 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-155
changing from D4
or D3 to D 1 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162
when depressing 6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-167
pedal.
OFF vehicle 9. Forward one-way clutch AT-342
Slips/Will Not 10. Low one-way clutch AT-280

Engage 1. Fluid level AT-17
ON vehicle
Vehicle will not 5. Oil pump AT-299
run in any posi-
tion. 6. High clutch AT-325
OFF vehicle
10. Parking components AT-272
Engine cannot be 1. Ignition switch and starter PG-2, SC-9
started in “P” and
ON vehicle 2. Control cable adjustment AT-252
“N” positions.
AT-207 3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-264
Engine starts in 1. Control cable adjustment AT-252
positions other ON vehicle
than “P” and “N”. 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-264

ON vehicle 3. Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor AT-172
Transaxle noise
Others in “P“ and “N” 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
positions. AT-109, AT-182
5. Oil pump AT-299
OFF vehicle
Vehicle moves ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-252
when changing
into “P” position
or parking gear
does not disen- OFF vehicle 2. Parking components AT-272
gage when
shifted out of “P”
position.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A
ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-252
Vehicle runs in 2. Forward clutch AT-331
“N” position.
AT-209 OFF vehicle 3. Reverse clutch AT-320 B
2. Control cable adjustment AT-252 AT
Vehicle braked D
when shifting into 5. Control valve assembly AT-260
“R” position.
7. Brake band AT-352 E
OFF vehicle
F
Excessive creep. ON vehicle 1. Engine idle speed EC-75
1. Engine idle speed EC-75
Others Engine stops
when shifting
2. Fluid level AT-17 G
ON vehicle
lever into “R”, “D”, 3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-142
“2” and “1” posi-
tions. H
OFF vehicle 5. Torque converter AT-280
ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-17
2. Reverse clutch AT-320 I
Vehicle braked by
gear change from 3. Low & reverse brake AT-338
D1 to D2 . OFF vehicle
5. Low one-way clutch AT-280
J
Vehicle braked by ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-17

gear change from
D2 to D3 . OFF vehicle 2. Brake band AT-352 K
Vehicle braked by 2. Overrun clutch AT-331
gear change from L
D3 to D4 . OFF vehicle 3. Forward one-way clutch AT-342
M

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

3. Overdrive control switch AT-249
ON vehicle 5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
AT-109, AT-182
Maximum speed 6. Shift solenoid valve A AT-162

not attained. 7. Shift solenoid valve B AT-167
Acceleration
poor. 8. Control valve assembly AT-260
OFF vehicle
13. Oil pump AT-299
Transaxle noise ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-17
in “D”, “2”, “1” and
“R” positions. OFF vehicle 2. Torque converter AT-280

Others 3. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor)
Engine brake ON vehicle AT-109, AT-182
does not operate
in “1” position. 4. Control valve assembly AT-260
OFF vehicle
2. Engine idle speed EC-75
ON vehicle
Transaxle over- 7. Oil pump AT-299

heats. 8. Reverse clutch AT-320
OFF vehicle

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A
ATF shoots out
during operation. 3. High clutch AT-325 B
White smoke
emitted from OFF vehicle
exhaust pipe dur- 5. Forward clutch AT-331
ing operation.
6. Overrun clutch AT-331 AT
Others D
3. Oil pump AT-299
4. Reverse clutch AT-320 E
Unusual smell at
fluid charging 5. High clutch AT-325
pipe. OFF vehicle
F
9. Low & reverse brake AT-338 G
TCM Terminals and Reference Value ACS007K6
TCM CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT

H
SCIA0495E
K
TCM INSPECTION TABLE

Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. L
Judgement stan-
Terminal Wire color Item Condition
dard (Approx.)
When releasing accelerator pedal
1.5 - 3.0V
M
Line pressure sole- after warming up engine.
1 R/W
noid valve When depressing accelerator pedal
0V
fully after warming up engine.
Line pressure sole- 5 - 14V
after warming up engine.
2 P/B noid valve (with drop-
ping resistor) When depressing accelerator pedal
0V
Torque converter When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V

3 GY/R
clutch solenoid valve When A/T does not perform lock-up. 0V
5 G/R CAN H — —
6 GY/R CAN L — —
When turning ignition switch ON. Battery voltage
10 BR/W Power source
When turning ignition switch OFF. 0V
or

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Judgement stan-
dard (Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve A oper-
ates. Battery voltage
(When driving in “D1 ” or “D4 ”.)
11 L/W Shift solenoid valve A
When shift solenoid valve A does not
operate. 0V
When shift solenoid valve B oper-
12 L/Y Shift solenoid valve B
When shift solenoid valve B does not
operate. 0V
19 BR/W Power source Same as No. 10

or
When overrun clutch solenoid valve
Battery voltage
operates.
Overrun clutch sole-
20 L/B
noid valve When overrun clutch solenoid valve
0V
does not operate.
25 B Ground Always 0V
When setting selector lever to “1”
Battery voltage
PNP switch “1” posi- position.
26 BR/Y
tion When setting selector lever to other
0V
positions.
and Battery voltage
27 L
0V
positions.
Power source
28 L Always Battery voltage
(Memory back-up)
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) 450 Hz
29 W/R Revolution sensor Under 1.3V or

When vehicle parks.
over 4.5V
30 *2 G/B CONSULT- II (RX) — —
31 *2 W CONSULT- II (TX) — —
When turning ignition switch ON. 4.5 - 5.5V
32 *1 L Sensor power
or

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Judgement stan-
dard (Approx.) A
When setting selector lever to “D”
Battery voltage
PNP switch “D” posi- position.
34 W/G
tion When setting selector lever to other B
0V
positions.
When setting selector lever to “R”
Battery voltage
PNP switch “R” posi- position. AT
35 Y/G
and 0V
positions.
When setting selector lever to “N” or D
Battery voltage
PNP switch “N” or “P” “P” position.
36 G
position When setting selector lever to other
0V
positions. E
39 *1 L/OR Engine speed signal Refer to EC-115, "ECM INSPECTION TABLE" .

and F
Voltage varies
When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h between less
40 L/W Vehicle speed sensor
(1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. than 0V and G
more than 4.5V
When depressing accelerator pedal Fully-closed H

Accelerator pedal slowly after warming up engine. throttle: 0.8V
41 *1 G/Y
position (APP) sensor (Voltage rises gradually in response Fully-open throt-
to throttle position.) tle: 4.4V
I
42 *1 B Sensor ground Always 0V
When ATF temperature is 20°C
1.5V
A/T fluid temperature (68°F). J
47 BR
sensor When ATF temperature is 80°C
0.5V
(176°F).
48 B Ground Always 0V K
*1: These terminals are connected to ECM.
*2: These terminals are connected to data link connector.
L

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function (A/T) ACS007K7
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function Reference page
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by
Work support —
following the indications on CONSULT-II.
Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. AT-82
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. AT-84
CAN diagnostic support
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. AT-87
monitor
Performed by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system
Function test —
is “OK” or “NG”.
DTC work support Select the operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes. AT-87
ECM (ECU,TCM) part
ECM (ECU,TCM) part number can be read. —
number
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE

NOTICE:
1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each sole-
noid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Man-
ual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
– Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
– Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
– Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3. Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at the start of shifting. Gear position is dis-
played upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.)
VHCL/S SE·A/T Approximately matches the speedometer
During driving
VHCL/S SE·MTR reading.
When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after Fully-closed throttle: 0.8V

warming up engine.
THRTL POS SEN
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle Fully-open throttle: 4.4V
position.)
When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F). 1.5V
FLUID TEMP SE
BATTERY VOLT When turning ignition switch to “ON”. Battery voltage
Approximately matches the tachometer
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
reading.
When O/D OFF indicator lamp is off. ON
OVERDRIVE SW
When O/D OFF indicator lamp is on. OFF
When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” posi-
ON
PN POSI SW tion.
When setting selector lever to other positions. OFF
When setting selector lever to “R” position. ON
R POSITION SW
When setting selector lever to “D” position. ON
D POSITION SW

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A
When setting selector lever to “2” position. ON
2 POSITION SW
When setting selector lever to “1” position. ON B
1 POSITION SW
Released accelerator pedal. ON
CLOSED THL/SW AT
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF
Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON
W/O THRL/P-SW
Released accelerator pedal. OFF
D
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
ON
SHIFT S/V A
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. E
OFF
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
ON
SHIFT S/V B F
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
OFF
When overrun clutch solenoid valve operates. ON
G
OVERRUN/C S/V When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not
OFF
operate.
Depressed brake pedal. ON H
BRAKE SW
Released brake pedal. OFF
GEAR During driving 1, 2, 3, 4
When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” posi- I
N·P
tion.
When setting selector lever to “R” position. R
SLCT LVR POSI J
When setting selector lever to “D” position. D
When setting selector lever to “2” position. 2
When setting selector lever to “1” position. 1 K
Approximately matches the speedometer
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
reading.
Small throttle opening (Low line pressure) ⇔ L
LINE PRES DTY 0% ⇔ 92%
Large throttle opening (High line pressure)
TCC S/V DUTY Lock-up OFF ⇔ Lock-up ON 4% ⇔ 94%
M

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
● For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Man-
ual”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector, which is located in instrument driver lower panel.
SCIA5579E

4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
SAIA0450E
5. Touch “A/T”.
If “A/T” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
SAT014K
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE

After performing AT-91, "Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II" , place check marks for results on the
AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the items.
Operation Procedure
1. Perform AT-82, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" .
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
SCIA5358E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Display Items List

Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Malfunction is detected when... Reference page
A
CAN COMM CIRCUIT ● Malfunction is detected in CAN communication line. AT-95

VHCL SPEED SEN·A/T AT-109 B
● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR AT-182
THROTTLE POSI SEN ● TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from this sensor AT-172
● TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the sole- AT
SHIFT SOLENOID/V A AT-162
noid valve.
● TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the sole-
SHIFT SOLENOID/V B AT-167
noid valve. D
OVERRUN CLUTCH S/V AT-177
noid valve.
● TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the sole- E
T/C CLUTCH SOL/V AT-142
noid valve.
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-104
● TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. F
BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN AT-187
ENGINE SPEED SIG ● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the ECM. AT-115
● A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is G
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-120
good.
● A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-125
good.
H
● A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-130
good.
● A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is I
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-135
good.
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN ● A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. AT-147
LINE PRESSURE S/V

AT-155
J
noid valve.
CONTROL UNIT (RAM) ● TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning AT-198
CONTROL UNIT (ROM) ● TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning AT-198 K
CONT UNIT(EEP ROM) ● TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. AT-200
● TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal (based on the gear
PNP SW/CIRC AT-98 L
position) from the switch.
● This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shutting off a power sup-
INITIAL START ply to the TCM, this message appears on the screen). Refer to AT-194, AT-194
"MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . M
No failure
(NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE
● No failure has been detected. —
INDICATED FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Erase Self-Diagnostic Results

SCIA5358E
3. Touch ”ERASE”. (The self-diagnostic results will be erased.)
PCIA0061E
DATA MONITOR MODE

Operation Procedure
2. Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
NOTE:
When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs
“REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS”. Also, any malfunction detected
while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
SCIA5358E
Display Items List

X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
SELECT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor item (Unit) SELEC- Remarks

TCM INPUT MAIN SIG-
TION FROM
SIGNALS NALS
MENU
VHCL/S SE·A/T (km/h) X — Revolution sensor
Vehicle speed display may not be accu-

rate under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It
VHCL/S SE·MTR (km/h) X —
may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph) when
vehicle is stationary.
THRTL POS SEN (V) X —
FLUID TEMP SE (V) X —
BATTERY VOLT (V) X —
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SELECT MONITOR ITEM

A
TCM INPUT MAIN SIG-
TION FROM
SIGNALS NALS
MENU
TURBINE REV (rpm) X — B
OVERDRIVE SW (ON/OFF) X —
PN POSI SW (ON/OFF) X — AT
R POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X —
D POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X — D
2 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X —
1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X —
E
ASCD·CRUISE (ON/OFF) X —
Signal input with CAN communication.
ACC OD CUT (ON/OFF) X —
F
KICKDOWN SW (ON/OFF) X —
Not mounted but displayed.
POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) X —
G
CLOSED THL/SW (ON/OFF) X —
Signal input with CAN communication.
W/O THRL/P-SW (ON/OFF) X —
*SHIFT S/V A (ON/OFF) — — H

Displays status of check signal (reinput
signal) for TCM control signal output.
*SHIFT S/V B (ON/OFF) — —
Remains unchanged when solenoid
*OVERRUN/C S/V (ON/OFF) — — valves are open or shorted. I
HOLD SW (ON/OFF) X — Not mounted but displayed.
BRAKE SW (ON/OFF) X — Stop lamp switch J

Gear position recognized by the TCM
GEAR — X
updated after gear-shifting
Selector lever position is recognized by K
the TCM.
SLCT LVR POSI — X
For fail-safe operation, the specific value
used for control is displayed.
L
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h) — X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM.
Degree of opening for accelerator recog-
nized by the TCM M
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) — X
For fail-safe operation, the specific value
used for control is displayed.
LINE PRES DTY (%) — X
TCC S/V DUTY (%) — X
SHIFT S/V A (ON/OFF) — X
SHIFT S/V B (ON/OFF) — X
OVERRUN/C S/V (ON/OFF) — X
SELF-D DP LMP (ON/OFF) — X
TC SLIP RATIO (0.000) — —
Difference between engine speed and

TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — —
torque converter input shaft speed
Displays the value measured by the volt-
Voltage (V) — —
age probe.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SELECT MONITOR ITEM

TCM INPUT MAIN SIG-
TION FROM
SIGNALS NALS
MENU
Frequency (Hz) — —
DUTY·HI (high) (%) — —

The value measured by the pulse probe
DUTY·LOW (low) (%) — —
is displayed.
PLS WIDTH·HI (ms) — —
PLS WIDTH·LOW (ms) — —

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT MONITOR MODE

Operation Procedure A
2. Touch “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”. Refer to LAN-13, "CAN
Diagnostic Support Monitor" . B
AT
SCIA5358E
E
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE
Operation Procedure
1. Perform AT-82, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . F
2. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.
I
SCIA5358E
3. Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.). J
SAT018K M
4. Touch “START”.
SAT589J

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. Perform driving test according to “DTC Confirmation Procedure”

in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
SAT019K
● When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen

changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
SAT591J
6. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may

exist. Go to “Diagnostic Procedure”.
SAT592J
SAT593J
7. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with

instructions displayed.
SAT594J

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
8. Touch “YES” or “NO”.

A
AT
SAT595J
D
9. CONSULT-II procedure ended.
If “NG” appears on the scene, a malfunction may exist. Go to
“Diagnostic Procedure”. E
G
SAT596J
SAT593J
K

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Display Items List

DTC work support item Description Check item
Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be con- ● Shift solenoid valve A
firmed.
● Shift solenoid valve B
1ST GR FNCTN P0731 ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed
or not) ● Each clutch
● Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) ● Hydraulic control circuit
Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be con-
firmed. ● Shift solenoid valve B
2ND GR FNCTN P0732 ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed ● Each clutch
or not) ● Hydraulic control circuit
● Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be con-
firmed. ● Shift solenoid valve A
3RD GR FNCTN P0733 ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed ● Each clutch
or not) ● Hydraulic control circuit
● Shift solenoid valve A
Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be con- ● Shift solenoid valve B
firmed.
● Overrun clutch solenoid valve
4TH GR FNCTN P0734 ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed
or not) ● Line pressure solenoid valve
● Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) ● Each clutch

● Hydraulic control circuit
Following items for “A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) (P0744)” can
● Torque converter clutch sole-
be confirmed.
noid valve
TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed
● Each clutch
or not)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ACS007K8
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A

● If a malfunction occurs in electrical system, turning ignition switch to ON will illuminate O/D OFF indicator
lamp for 2 seconds. To detect a malfunction, entering a self-diagnosis start signal retrieves information on
malfunctions from memory and indicates malfunction by blinking O/D OFF indicator lamp. B
Diagnostic Procedure
1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP AT

2. Move selector lever to “P” position. D
3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 5 seconds.
SCIA5472E
G

Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on about 2 seconds? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Stop procedure. Perform AT-205, "O/D OFF Indicator
Lamp Does Not Come On" before proceeding. I
SCIA5468E
K
2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1
L
2. Keep pressing shift lock release button.
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position.
M
5. Keep pressing overdrive control switch while O/D OFF indicator lamp is lighting up for 2 seconds. (O/D
OFF indicator lamp is on.)
6. Keep pressing overdrive control switch and shift selector lever to the position “2”. (O/D OFF indicator lamp
is on.)
7. Stop pressing overdrive control switch. (O/D OFF indicator lamp is on.)
8. Shift selector lever to the position “1”. (O/D OFF indicator lamp is on.)
9. Keep pressing overdrive control switch. (O/D OFF indicator lamp is off.)
10. Depress accelerator pedal fully while pressing overdrive control switch.
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE

Check O/D OFF indicator lamp. Refer to AT-92, "JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE" .
>> DIAGNOSIS END

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE

All judgement flickers are the same. 1st judgement flicker is longer than others.
SCIA4672E SCIA5591E
All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK. Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLU-
TION SENSOR).
Refer to AT-109
2nd judgement flicker is longer than others. 3rd judgement flicker is longer than others.
SCIA5592E SCIA5593E
Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit is short-circuited
Þ Go to DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR. or disconnected.
Refer to AT-182 Þ Go to DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP)
SENSOR.
Refer to AT-172
4th judgement flicker is longer than others. 5th judgement flicker is longer than others.
SCIA5594E SCIA5595E
Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A. Þ Go to DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B.
Refer to AT-162 Refer to AT-167

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

A
AT
SCIA5596E SCIA5597E
E
Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or
nected. disconnected.
Þ Go to DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. Þ Go to DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLE-
Refer to AT-177 NOID VALVE. F
Refer to AT-142
G
J
SCIA5598E SCIA5599E
A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power sup- Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
ply circuit is damaged. Þ Go to DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL. K
Þ Go to DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SEN- Refer to AT-115
SOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE).
Refer to AT-187
L

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

SCIA5600E SCIA4673E
Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon- CAN communication line is damaged.
nected. ÞGo to DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.
Þ Go to DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. Refer to AT-95
Refer to AT-155
Lamp comes off. Flickers as shown below.
SCIA4674E SCIA4675E
PNP switch, overdrive control switch, closed throttle position sig- Battery power is low.
nal or wide open throttle position signal circuit is disconnected or Battery has been disconnected for a long time.
TCM is damaged. Battery is connected conversely.
(Because closed throttle position signal and wide open throttle (When reconnecting TCM connectors.—This is not a malfunc-
position signal are input via CAN communication line malfunction tion).
may continue after self-diagnosis.) ÞGo to MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.
Þ Go to TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate Refer to AT-194
Refer to AT-244
t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second t4 = 1.0 second
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait for at least
5 seconds and then turn it ON again.
2. Perform AT-91, "Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II" .
3. Turn ignition switch OFF. (The self-diagnostic results will be erased.)

DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS007QZ
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- B
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. AT
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007R0
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. D

● Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or 11th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the switch based on the
gear position. E
Possible Cause ACS007R1
Harness or connectors F
(CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007R2
CAUTION: G
If performing this “DTC Confirmation Procedure” again, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before continuing.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. H
WITH CONSULT-II
I
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 6 seconds or start engine and wait for at least 6
seconds.
J
4. If DTC is detected, go to AT-97, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
L
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”
WITHOUT CONSULT-II M
2. Wait at least 6 seconds or start engine and wait at least 6 seconds.
3. Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to AT-91, "Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II" .

Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ACS007R3
TCWA0234E

Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Judgement A
Terminal Wire color Item Condition standard
(Approx.)
5 G/R CAN H — — B
6 GY/R CAN L — —
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007R4

AT
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II D
1. Turn ignition switch ON and start engine.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-
II. E
Is any malfunction of the “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” indicated?
YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN section.
Refer to LAN-4, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK F
FLOW" .
NO >> INSPECTION END
G
PCIA0061E

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH PFP:32006
Description ACS007R5
● The PNP switch assembly includes a transaxle range switch.

● The transaxle range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS007Z0
Item name Condition Display value

When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” position. ON
PN POSI SW
When setting selector lever to “R” position. ON
R POSITION SW
When setting selector lever to “D” position. ON
D POSITION SW
2 POSITION SW
1 POSITION SW
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007R6
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the
correct voltage signal from the switch based on the gear position.
Possible Cause ACS007R7
● Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.]
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007R8
CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
● If performing this “DTC Confirmation Procedure” again, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before continuing.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position (OD ON or OFF)
4. If the check result is NG, go to AT-101, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”.

Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ACS007WU
AT
TCWA0229E

Judgement stan-
dard (Approx.)
Battery voltage
PNP switch “1” position.
26 BR/Y
position When setting selector lever to
0V
other positions.
Battery voltage
PNP switch “2” position.
27 L
0V
other positions.
Battery voltage
PNP switch “D” position.
34 W/G
and 0V
other positions.
Battery voltage
PNP switch “R” position.
35 Y/G
0V
other positions.
When setting selector lever to “N”
Battery voltage
PNP switch “N” or “P” position.
36 G
or “P” position When setting selector lever to
0V
other positions.

Diagnostic Procedure ACS007Z1
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) A
With CONSULT-II
B
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
AT
3. Read out “P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving
selector lever to each position.
Item name Condition Display value D
When setting selector lever to
ON
“N” or “P” position.
PN POSI SW
When setting selector lever to E
OFF SAT701J
other positions.
ON
“R” position. F
R POSITION SW
OFF
other positions.
ON
G
“D” position.
D POSITION SW
OFF
other positions. H
ON
“2” position.
2 POSITION SW
When setting selector lever to I
OFF
other positions.
ON
“1” position.
1 POSITION SW J
OFF
other positions.
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3.
L

2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground
while moving selector lever through each position.
Terminal
Lever position
36 35 34 27 26
“P”, “N” B 0 0 0 0
“R” 0 B 0 0 0
“D” 0 0 B 0 0
“2” 0 0 0 B 0
“1” 0 0 0 0 B
B: Battery voltage
0: 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SCIA5587E
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH

2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between PNP switch harness connector termi-
nals.
Lever position Connector Terminal Continuity
“P” 1 - 2, 3 - 7 Yes
“R” 3-8 *Continuity
should not
“N” 1 - 2, 3 - 9 exist in posi-
F24
“D” 3-6 tions other
than the
“2” 3-5 specified
“1” 3-4 positions. SCIA5588E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT

Check PNP switch again with control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to test
group 3.
OK or NG
OK >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-252, "Adjustment of A/T Position" .
NG >> Repair or replace PNP switch. Refer to AT-263, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch" .

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS A

Check the following.
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
● Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM. B
● Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and combination meter.
● Harness for short or open between combination meter and TCM.
AT
● 10A fuse (NO.12, located in the fuse block)
● Combination meter. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E
6. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-98, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . F
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 7. G
7. CHECK TCM
H
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-77, "TCM Terminals and Reference Value" .
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG I
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
J

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PFP:31940
Description ACS007RA
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.

FLUID TEMP SE
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007RB

● Diagnostic trouble code “ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an
excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
Possible Cause ACS007RC

● Harness or connector
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● A/T fluid temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007RD
CAUTION:
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.)
ENG SPEED: 450 rpm or more
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position (OD ON)
SAT014K
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle under the following conditions.
Selector lever: “D” position
Vehicle speed: higher than 20km/h (12MPH)

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ACS007WV
AT
TCWB0007E

Judgement stan-
dard (Approx.)
42 B Sensor ground Always 0V
When ATF temperature is 20°C
1.5V
A/T fluid tempera- (68°F).
47 BR
ture sensor When ATF temperature is 80°C
0.5V
(176°F).
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007RE
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
FLUID TEMP SE
SCIA4730E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage TCM connector while warming up A/T.
Judgement
Terminal
Item Connector Condition standard
(Wire color)
(Approx.)
When ATF temperature
1.5V
TCM con- 47 (BR) is 20°C (68°F).
F47
nector - 42 (B) When ATF temperature
0.5V
is 80°C (176°F).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. SCIA2658E
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS

● Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly
● Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to EC-155, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

A
2. Disconnect the TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals. B
Terminal Tempera- Resistance

Item Connector
(Wire color) ture °C (°F) (Approx.)
AT
TCM con- 20 (68) 2.5kΩ
F47 47 (BR) - 42 (B)
nector 80 (176) 0.3kΩ
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
E
SCIA4947E
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR F

2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector and TCM connector. G
3. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness con-
nector terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Terminal H
Item Connector Continuity
(Wire color)
TCM connector F47 42 (B)
Terminal cord assembly Yes I
F23 7 (B)
harness connector
TCM connector F47 47 (BR)
Terminal cord assembly Yes J
F23 6 (BR) SCIA2660E
harness connector
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
K
5. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. L
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

M
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector in engine room.
3. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness con-
nector terminals.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance (Approx.)
20 (68) 2.5 kΩ
80 (176) 0.3 kΩ
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SCIA4948E

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
2. Check the following.
– A/T fluid temperature sensor
• Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness con-
nector terminals while changing temperature as shown.
20 (68) 2.5 kΩ
80 (176) 0.3 kΩ
– Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SAT298F
7. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-104, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" .
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM
OK or NG
Component Inspection ACS007RF
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

● Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and
Accumulators" .
● Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness con-
nector terminals while changing temperature as shown.

20 (68) 2.5 kΩ
80 (176) 0.3 kΩ
SAT298F

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) PFP:32702

A
Description ACS007RG
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal.
The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. B
Item name Condition Display value AT

VHCL/S SE·A/T During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007RH

D
● Diagnostic trouble code “VECH SPEED SEN·AT” with CONSULT-II or 1st judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. E
Possible Cause ACS007RI

F
● Revolution sensor G
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007RJ
CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
at least 10 seconds before continuing. I
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm that the malfunction is eliminated.
WITH CONSULT-II J
2. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” K
value increase.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step. L
M
SAT014K

Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
If the check result is OK, go to following step. SCIA5358E
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive sec-

onds.
ENGINE SPEED: 3,500 rpm or more

Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.
WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle under the following conditions for more than 5 seconds.
Selector lever: “D” position
Vehicle speed: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more
Throttle position: greater than 1.0/8 of the full throttle position

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ACS007RK
AT
TCWB0008E

Judgement stan-
Terminal Wire color Item Condition dard
(Approx.)
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) 450 Hz
29 W/R Revolution sensor Under 1.3V or

When vehicle parks.
over 4.5V
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007RL
1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
Approximately matches the speed-
VHCL/S SE·A/T During driving
ometer reading.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SCIA4730E
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR
1. Start engine.
2. Check power supply to revolution sensor by voltage between TCM connector terminals. Refer to AT-195,
"Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" and AT-111, "Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T" .
Judgement standard
Item Connector Terminal (Wire color)
(Approx.)
10 (BR/W) - 42 (B)
TCM connector F46, F47 Battery voltage
19 (BR/W) - 42 (B)
3. If OK, check the pulse when vehicle cruises.

Item Condition
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II
pulse frequency measuring function.
Revolution sensor CAUTION:
Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the data link
connector.
Item Connector Terminal (Wire color) Data (Approx.)

TCM connector F47 29 (W/R) 450 Hz
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SCIA4939E

3. CHECK POWER AND SENSOR GROUND

A
2. Disconnect revolution sensor harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) B
4. Check voltage between revolution sensor harness connector
terminals.
AT
Judgement standard
(Approx.)
Revolution sensor
F15 1 (BR/W) - 3 (B) Battery voltage D
harness connector
SCIA5589E
5. Check voltage between revolution sensor harness connector F

terminal and ground.
Judgement standard
(Approx.)
G
Revolution sensor
F15 1 (BR/W) - ground Battery voltage
harness connector
H
OK or NG I
SCIA5590E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG - 1 >> Battery voltage is not supplied between terminals 1 and 3, terminals 1 and ground: GO TO 6.
NG - 2 >> Battery voltage is not supplied between terminals 1 and 3 only: GO TO 7. J
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND REVOLUTION SENSOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K

2. Disconnect TCM connector and revolution sensor harness connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM connector terminal and revolu-
tion sensor harness connector terminal. L
Item Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity

TCM connector F47 29 (W/R) M
Revolution sensor harness Yes
F15 2 (W/R)
connector

OK or NG SCIA2616E
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK TCM
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND REVOLUTION SENSOR (POWER)

tion sensor harness connector terminal. Refer to AT-51, "Circuit
Diagram" and AT-195, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" .
TCM connector F46 10 (BR/W)
F15 1 (BR/W)
connector
TCM connector F46 19 (BR/W)
F15 1 (BR/W) SCIA2617E
connector
OK or NG
OK >> 10A fuse (No.12, located in the fuse block) or ignition switch are malfunctioning.
7. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND REVOLUTION SENSOR (SENSOR GROUND)

tion sensor harness connector terminal.
F15 3 (B)
connector
OK or NG SCIA2618E
OK >> GO TO 5.
8. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL PFP:24825

A
Description ACS007RM
The engine speed signal is sent from ECM to TCM.

B

Approximately matches the tachometer AT
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
reading.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007RN

D
● Diagnostic trouble code “ENGINE SPEED SIG” with CONSULT-II or 9th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from ECM. E
Possible Cause ACS007RO
Harness or connector (The circuit is open or shorted.)

F
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007RP
CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. G
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. H
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for I
SAT014K L

VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more M
SCIA5358E
WITH GST

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Selector lever: “D” position (OD ON)
Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
Throttle position: greater than 1.0/8 of the full throttle position

Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ACS007RQ
AT
TCWA0232E

Judgement standard
(Approx.)
Refer to EC-115,
39 L/OR Engine speed signal "ECM INSPECTION
and TABLE" .
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007RR
1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM

Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Check ignition signal circuit condi-
tion.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-586, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”.
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.
ENGINE Approximately matches the
Engine running
SPEED tachometer reading.
SCIA4730E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Terminal Judgement standard
Item Connector Condition
(Wire color) (Approx.)
Refer to EC-115,
TCM con- 39 (L/OR) - and
F47 "ECM INSPECTION
nector Ground
TABLE" .
OK or NG SCIA3265E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND ECM

A
2. Disconnect ECM connector and TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between ECM connector terminal and TCM B
connector terminal.
AT
TCM F47 39 (L/OR)
Yes
ECM M118 103 (L/OR)
4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. D
OK or NG
E
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power

in harness or connectors.
F
4. CHECK DTC
G
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5. H
5. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signal. Refer to AT-77, "TCM Terminals and Reference Value" . I
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END J

DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION PFP:31940
Description ACS007RS
● This malfunction will not be detected while O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis
malfunction.
● This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by TCM. This
is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as
control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007RT

● This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM
as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more
than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is
stuck open.
● Gear positions supposed by TCM are as follows.
In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1 , 2, 3 and 4 positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open: 2* , 2, 3 and 3 positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open: 4* , 3, 3 and 4 positions to each gear posi-
tion above
*: P0731 is detected.
● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 1ST GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted
to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause ACS007RU

● Each clutch
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007RV
CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with A
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is
within the range below. B
FLUID TEMP SE: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up
the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the
AT
fluid).
3. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
SAT014K
D
4. Accelerate vehicle to 15 to 20 km/h (9 to 12 MPH) under the fol-

lowing condition and release accelerator pedal completely. E
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
– Make sure that “GEAR” shows “2” after releasing pedal.
F
5. Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of “THROT-
TLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 15 to 20 km/h (9 to 12 MPH)
until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) G
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT-
123, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SCIA5358E
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to the H

following step.
– Make sure that “GEAR” shows “1” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT.
– If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” for I
“ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSIS FOR DTC”.
6. Stop vehicle. J
7. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
Vehicle condition K
screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4
No malfunction exists 1→2→3→4
Malfunction for P0731 2→2→3→3

L
exists. 4→3→3→4
8. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to AT-123, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M
Refer to AT-66, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" .
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram — AT — 1STSIG ACS007WW
TCWA0049E

Judgement stan- A
dard (Approx.)
Battery voltage
B
11 L/W Shift solenoid valve A When shift solenoid valve A does not
operate. 0V
AT
Battery voltage
12 L/Y Shift solenoid valve B When shift solenoid valve B does not
operate. 0V
D
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007RW

E
1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
F
– Shift solenoid valve A
– Shift solenoid valve B
2. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness con- G
nector terminals and ground.
Solenoid valve Terminal Resistance (Approx.)
H
Shift solenoid valve A 2 20 - 30Ω
Ground
Shift solenoid valve B 1 5 - 20Ω
3. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
4. If OK, check continuity between ground and transaxle assembly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. J
NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
SCIA3594E

2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION

2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminals and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
SCIA3595E
3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-304, "Control Valve Assembly" .
2. Check to ensure that:
● Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
● Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
● Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
● Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair control valve assembly.
4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ACS007RX
malfunction. B
● This malfunction is detected when A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by TCM. This
is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as
control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. AT
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007RY
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. E

as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B F
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes G
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck open.
H
In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2 , 3 and 4 positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open: 4, 3* , 3 and 4 positions to each gear posi-
tion above I
● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 2ND GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted
to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. J
Possible Cause ACS007RZ
Check the following. K

● Each clutch
● Hydraulic control circuit L
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007S0
CAUTION: M
TESTING CONDITION:

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
within the range below.
fluid).
3. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
SAT014K
4. Accelerate vehicle to 35 to 40 km/h (22 to 25 MPH) under the

following condition and release accelerator pedal completely.
– Make sure that “GEAR” shows “3” or “4” after releasing
pedal.
5. Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of “THROT-
TLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 35 to 40 km/h (22 to 25
MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT- SCIA5358E
128, "Diagnostic Procedure" .

If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step.
– Make sure that “GEAR” shows “2” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT.
– If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” for
NOSIS FOR DTC”.
6. Stop vehicle.
Vehicle condition
Malfunction for P0732
4→3→3→4
exists.
Refer to AT-128, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram — AT — 2NDSIG ACS007WX
AT
TCWA0050E

Wire Judgement stan-
Terminal Item Condition
color dard (Approx.)
Battery voltage
12 L/Y Shift solenoid valve B When shift solenoid valve B does not
operate. 0V
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007S1

nector terminal and ground.
Resistance
Solenoid valve Terminal
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid valve B 1 Ground 5 - 20Ω

OK or NG

applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair to replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
SCIA2058E

– Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
– Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
– Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
– Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK DTC A
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END B
AT

DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION PFP:31940
Description ACS007S2
malfunction.
● This malfunction is detected when A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by TCM. This is
not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as con-
trol valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston or brake band, etc.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007S3

as follows:
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck closed.
In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck closed: 1, 1, 4* and 4 positions to each gear
position above
● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 3RD GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted
to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Possible Cause ACS007S4

● Each clutch
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007S5
CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION:

WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with A
CONSULT-II.
within the range below. B
AT
fluid).
3. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
SAT014K
D

following condition and release accelerator pedal completely. E
F
5. Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROT-
TLE POSI” from a speed of 55 to 70 km/h (34 to 44 MPH) until
“TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 3 seconds.) G
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to fol- H

lowing step.
– Make sure that “GEAR” shows “3” when depressing accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”. I
NOSIS FOR DTC”.
J
6. Stop vehicle.
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when K
Vehicle condition
No malfunction exists. 1→2→3→4
L
Malfunction for P0733 exists. 1→1→4→4
8. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to Diagnostic Procedure.)
M
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RDSIG ACS007WY
TCWA0051E

Wire Judgement stan- A
Battery voltage
B
11 L/W Shift solenoid valve A When shift solenoid valve A does not
operate. 0V
AT
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007S6
1. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE D

2. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness con- E
Resistance F
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid valve A 2 Ground 20 - 30Ω
3. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. G

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. H
SCIA2049E
2. CHECK VALVE OPERATION I

J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
L
M
SCIA2052E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK DTC
OK or NG

DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION PFP:31940

A
Description ACS007S7
malfunction. B
● This malfunction is detected when A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or line pressure is low as
instructed by TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechani-
cal malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump AT
or torque converter clutch, etc.
Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) D
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS007Z4 E

Small throttle opening (Low line pressure) ⇔ Large throttle opening
LINE PRES DTY 0% ⇔ 92% F
(High line pressure)
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007S8
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. G

as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B H
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes I
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be
much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis
malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is stuck J
closed.
In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions K
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open: 2, 2, 3 and 3* positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed: 1, 2, 2 and 1* positions to each gear
position above
L
● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 4TH GR FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot be shifted
to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
M
Possible Cause ACS007S9

● Line pressure solenoid valve
● Each clutch
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007SA
CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION:


WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
fluid).
3. Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
SAT014K

following condition and release accelerator pedal completely.
5. Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROT-
TLE POSI” from a speed of 55 to 65 km/h (34 to 40 MPH) until
“TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”.
(It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to fol-

lowing step.
– Make sure that “GEAR” shows “4” when depressing accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”.
NOSIS FOR DTC”.
6. Stop vehicle.
Vehicle condition
2→2→3→3
Malfunction for P0734 exists.
1→2→2→1
8. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to Diagnostic Procedure.)
WITH GST

Wiring Diagram — AT — 4THSIG ACS007X6
AT
TCWA0052E

1.5 - 3.0V
Line pressure solenoid
1 R/W When depressing accelerator
valve
pedal fully after warming up 0V
engine.
5 - 14V
Line pressure solenoid after warming up engine.
2 P/B valve (with dropping When depressing accelerator
resistor) pedal fully after warming up 0V
engine.
11 L/W Shift solenoid valve A
When shift solenoid valve A does
not operate. 0V
When shift solenoid valve B oper-
12 L/Y Shift solenoid valve B
When shift solenoid valve B does
not operate. 0V
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007X9
1. CHECK SHIFT−UP (D3 TO D4 )
During AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" .

YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 2.
SAT988H
2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Perform line pressure test.
Refer to AT-55, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
Engine speed rpm
Idle 500 (5.1, 73) 778 (7.9, 113)
Stall 1,233 (12.6, 179) 1,918 (19.6, 278)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 7.

3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE A

– Shift solenoid valve B B
nector terminals and ground.
AT
Resistance
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid valve A 2 20 - 30Ω D
Ground
Shift solenoid valve B 1 5 - 20Ω
4. If OK, check continuity between ground and transaxle assembly. E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. F
SCIA3594E I

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . J
K
applying battery voltage to the terminals and ground.
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly.
M
SCIA3595E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair control valve.

YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control
valve assembly.
SAT988H

– Line pressure solenoid valve
Resistance
(Approx.)
Line pressure solenoid valve 4 Ground 2.5 - 5Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SCIA3457E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
SCIA3275E

9. CHECK CONTROL VALVE A

2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
– Pilot valve B
AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace control valve.
D
During AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" . E

YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control F
valve assembly.
SAT988H H
11. CHECK DTC

Perform AT-135, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . I
OK or NG
J
NG >> Perform AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" again and return to the start point of this test group.

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940
Description ACS007SC
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in “D4 ”, by TCM in response to signals sent
from vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Lock-up piston operation will then be controlled.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.

On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007SD

● Diagnostic trouble code “T/C CLUTCH SOL/V” with CONSULT-II or 7th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate solenoid valve.
Possible Cause ACS007SE

● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007SF
CAUTION:
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and
wait at least 1 second.
VEHICLE SPEED: 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more
THROTTLE POSI: 0.5/8 - 1.0/8
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
4. If the check result is NG go to AT-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K
WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle in D1 → D2 → D3 → D4 → D4 lock-up position.

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV ACS007SG
AT
TCWA0043E

When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V
Torque converter
3 GY/R clutch solenoid
valve When A/T does not perform lock-up. 0V
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007SH

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “TCC S/V DUTY” while driving.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
SCIA3257E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Judge-
Terminal ment stan-
(Wire color) dard
(Approx.)
When A/T performs
8 - 15V
3 (GY/R) - lock-up.
TCM connector F46
Ground When A/T does not
0V
perform lock-up.
OK or NG SCIA3261E
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect TCM connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal and ground. B
Resistance
Solenoid Valve Connector Terminal (Wire color)
(Approx.)
AT
Torque converter clutch
F46 3 (GY/R) - Ground 5 - 20 Ω
solenoid valve
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
E
SCIA3262E
3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR
F
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector and TCM connector.
3. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness con- G
nector terminal and TCM connector terminal.
H
TCM connector F46 3 (GY/R)
Terminal cord assembly Yes
F23 5 (GY/R)
harness connector
I
6. Reinstall any part removed. SCIA3263E J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
nector terminal and ground. M
Solenoid valve Connector Terminal Resistance (Approx.)

F23 5 - Ground 5 - 20Ω
solenoid valve
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
SCIA3456E
5. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
OK or NG
Component Inspection ACS007SI
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

● For removal, refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
Resistance
● Check resistance between terminal and ground.
Resistance
(Approx.)
Torque converter
clutch solenoid 5 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve
SCIA2063E
Operation
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
SCIA2066E

DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)
DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) PFP:31940

A
Description ACS007NF
● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.

● This malfunction will not be detected while O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B
malfunction.
● This malfunction is detected when A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or torque converter clutch
does not lock-up as instructed by TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or AT
shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation,
malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS007Z6 D

TCC S/V DUTY Lock-up OFF ⇔ Lock-up ON 4% ⇔ 94% E
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007NG

F

● This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM G
as follows:
B: Engine speed signal from ECM H
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be
much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis I
malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed.
J
In case of gear position with no malfunctions: 1, 2, 3 and 4 positions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed: 1, 2, 2 and 1* positions to each gear posi-
tion above
*: P0744 is detected. K
● Diagnostic trouble code “A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected when A/T cannot perform
lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
L
Possible Cause ACS007NH

● Line pressure solenoid valve M
● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
● Each clutch

DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007NI
CAUTION:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
If out of range, drive vehicle to decrease voltage (warm up the
fluid) or stop engine to increase voltage (cool down the fluid).
3. Select “TCC S/V FNCTN P0744” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
SAT014K
4. Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain

the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned
to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after
“TESTING” shows.)
THROTTLE POSI: 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
SLCT LVR POSI: “D” position
TCC S/V DUTY: 94%
VHCL/S SE·A/T: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50
MPH)
– Make sure that “GEAR” shows “4”.
– For shift schedule, refer to AT-66, "Vehicle Speed When SCIA5358E
Shifting Gears" .
– If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In
case a 1st trip DTC other than “A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
Refer to AT-66, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Lock-Up" .

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ACS007X7
AT
TCWB0009E

Termi- Wire Judgement stan-
Item Condition
nal color dard (Approx.)
1.5 - 3.0V
Line pressure solenoid after warming up engine.
1 R/W
valve When depressing accelerator pedal
0V
Line pressure solenoid 5 - 14V
2 P/B valve (with dropping resis-
tor) When depressing accelerator pedal
0V
When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V
3 GY/R When A/T does not perform lock-
solenoid valve 0V
up.
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007XA

YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 2.
SAT988H

Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-55, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
Engine speed rpm
Idle 500 (5.1, 73) 778 (7.9, 113)
Stall 1,233 (12.6, 179) 1,918 (19.6, 278)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 6.

– Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
– Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
– Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
– Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.


A
YES >> GO TO 5. B
valve assembly.
AT
D
SAT988H
5. CHECK DTC E

OK or NG
F
NG >> GO TO 11.
6. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE G
– Line pressure solenoid valve H
I
Resistance
(Approx.)
Line pressure solenoid valve 4 Ground 2.5 - 5Ω
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. K
SCIA4951E
7. CHECK VALVE OPERATION L
– Line pressure solenoid valve M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SCIA3275E


2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
– Pressure regulator valve
– Pilot valve
– Pressure modifier valve
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

YES >> GO TO 10.
valve assembly.
SAT988H
10. CHECK DTC

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK LOCK−UP

A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
YES >> Perform AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" again and return
to the start point of this test group.
NO >> GO TO 12.
SAT989H

12. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE A

– Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
2. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness con- B
Resistance
Solenoid valve Terminal AT
(Approx.)
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 5 Ground 5 - 20Ω
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 13.
E
SCIA2063E

F
2. Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. H
SCIA2066E J

1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-304, "Control Valve Assembly" . K
2. Check control valves for sticking.
– Torque converter clutch control valve
L
– Torque converter clutch relief valve
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. M
15. CHECK LOCK−UP

A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
YES >> GO TO 16.
valve assembly.
SAT989H

16. CHECK DTC

OK or NG
NG >> Perform AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" again and return to the start point of this test group.

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS007SJ
Line pressure solenoid valve regulates oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to
a signal sent from TCM. B
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is ON. To
confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, accelerator (throttle) should be open until the
closed throttle position switch is OFF.
AT

D
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007SK E

● Diagnostic trouble code “L/PRESS SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 10th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid F
valve.
Possible Cause ACS007SL
G
(The solenoid circuit is open shorted.) H
● Line pressure solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007SM
I
CAUTION:
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm that the malfunction is eliminated. J
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for K
SAT014K
2. Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 5 sec-

onds.
3. If check result is NG, go to AT-158, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SCIA5358E

WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. With brake pedal depressed, shift the lever from “P” → “N” → “D” → “N” → “P” positions.

Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ACS007SN
AT
TCWA0046E

Judgement stan-
(Approx.)
1.5 - 3.0V
Line pressure after warming up engine.
1 R/W
solenoid valve When depressing accelerator pedal
0V
Line pressure When releasing accelerator pedal

5 - 14V
solenoid valve after warming up engine.
2 P/B
(with dropping When depressing accelerator pedal
resistor) 0V
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007SO

With CONSULT-II
3. Read out the value of “LINE PRES DTY” while driving.
Display value
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
Small throttle opening (Low line pressure)
LINE PRES DTY ⇔ Large throttle opening (High line pres- 0% ⇔ 92%
sure)
SCIA3251E
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground.
Judge-
Terminal ment stan-
(Wire color) dard
(Approx.)
When releasing acceler-
ator pedal after warming 1.5 - 3.0V
TCM con- 1 (R/W) - up engine.
F46
nector Ground When depressing accel-
erator pedal fully after 0V
SCIA3267E
warming up engine.
When releasing acceler-
ator pedal after warming 5 - 14V
TCM con- 2 (P/B) - up engine.
F46
nector Ground When depressing accel-
erator pedal fully after 0V
warming up engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK DROPPING RESISTOR A

2. Disconnect dropping resistor harness connector in engine room.
3. Check resistance between terminals. B
Resistance
Item Connector Terminal
(Approx.)
AT
Dropping resistor harness
E49 1-2 12 Ω
connector
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 3.
E
SCIA3276E

F
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine room.
3. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness con- G
H
Line pressure solenoid
F23 4 - Ground 2.5 - 5.0 Ω
valve
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 4.
SCIA4951E J


Terminal
(Wire color)
TCM connector F46 1 (R/W)
F23 4 (R/W)
harness connector
SCIA3272E

nector terminal and dropping resistor harness connector termi-
nal.
Terminal
(Wire color)
Dropping resistor harness
E49 1 (R/W)
connector
Yes
Terminal cord assembly
F23 4 (R/W)
harness connector
SCIA3273E
5. Check continuity between dropping resistor harness connector

terminal and TCM connector terminal.
Terminal
(Wire color)
TCM connector F46 2 (P/B)
Dropping resistor harness Yes
E49 2 (P/B)
connector

SCIA3274E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK TCM
OK or NG

Component Inspection ACS007SP
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE A

Resistance B
Resistance
(Approx.) AT
Line pressure
4 Ground 2.5 - 5.0Ω
solenoid valve
D
E
SCIA4951E
Operation
● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while F
SCIA3275E
I
DROPPING RESISTOR
● Check resistance between terminals. J
Resistance
Item Connector Terminal
(Approx.)
Dropping resistor harness K
E49 1-2 12 Ω
connector
SCIA3276E
M

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A PFP:31940
Description ACS007SQ
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned ON or OFF by TCM in response to signals sent from PNP switch,
vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.

When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in “D1 ” or “D4 ”.) ON
SHIFT S/V A
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. (When driving in “D2 ” or “D3 ”.) OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007SR

● Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOLENOID/V A” with CONSULT-II or 4th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid
valve.
Possible Cause ACS007SS

DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007ST
CAUTION:
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
3. Drive vehicle in “D” position and allow the transaxle to shift “1”
→ “2” (“GEAR”).
SAT014K
WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle in “D1” → “D2 ” position.

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ACS007SU
AT
TCWA0040E

Judgement stan-
(Approx.)
Shift sole- (When driving in “D1 ” or “D4 ”.)
11 L/W
noid valve A When shift solenoid valve A does not
operate. 0V
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007SV

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “SHIFT S/V A” while driving.
ON
SHIFT S/V A
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
OFF
SCIA3251E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Judgement
Terminal
(Wire color)
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve
A operates. Battery volt-
(When driving in “D1 ” or age
TCM con- 11 (L/W) - “D4 ”.)
F46
nector Ground When shift solenoid valve
A does not operate.
0V SCIA3248E
(When driving in “D2 ” or
“D3 ”.)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CIRCUIT A

3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal and ground. B
Terminal Resistance
Solenoid valve Connector
AT
11 (L/W) -
Shift solenoid valve A F46 20 - 30 Ω
Ground
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
E
SCIA3249E
F
3. Check continuity between terminal cord assembly harness con- G
Terminal
(Wire color) H
TCM connector F46 11 (L/W)
F23 2 (L/W) I
harness connector

SCIA3250E J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
nector terminal and ground. M
Shift solenoid valve A F23 2 - Ground 20 - 30 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
SCIA3453E
5. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM
OK or NG
Component Inspection ACS007SW
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

Resistance
Resistance
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid
2 Ground 20 - 30Ω
valve A
SCIA2049E
Operation
SCIA2052E

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B PFP:31940

A
Description ACS007SX
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned ON or OFF by TCM in response to signals sent from PNP switch,
vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. B
AT
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS007ZA
D
When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in “D1 ” or “D2 ”.) ON
SHIFT S/V B
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. (When driving in “D3 ” or “D4 ”.) OFF E
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007SY

F
● Diagnostic trouble code “SHIFT SOLENOID/V B” with CONSULT-II or 5th judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid
valve.
G
Possible Cause ACS007SZ

● Harness or connector H
I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007T0
CAUTION:
● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. J
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm that the malfunction is eliminated. K
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for L
2. Start engine.
3. Drive vehicle in “D” position and allow the transaxle to shift “1” M
→ “2” → “3” (“GEAR”).
SAT014K
WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” → “D2” → “D3” position.

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ACS007T1
TCWA0041E

Judgement stan- A
Termi-
Wire color Item Condition dard
nal
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve B oper- B
Shift solenoid (When driving in “D1 ” or “D2 ”.)
12 L/Y
valve B When shift solenoid valve B does not AT
operate. 0V
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007T2 D

With CONSULT-II E
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “SHIFT S/V B” while driving. F
Item name Condition Display value G
ON
SHIFT S/V B
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
OFF
H
I
SCIA3251E
Without CONSULT-II J
1. Start engine.
Judgement
K
Terminal
(Wire color)
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid L
valve B operates.
Battery voltage
(When driving in “D1 ”
or “D2 ”.)
TCM con- 12 (L/Y) - M
F46 When shift solenoid
nector Ground
valve B does not oper-
SCIA3253E
ate. 0V
(When driving in “D3 ”
or “D4 ”.)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B CIRCUIT

3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Terminal Resistance
12 (L/Y) -
Shift solenoid valve B F46 5 - 20 Ω
Ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SCIA3254E

TCM connector F46 12 (L/Y)
F23 1 (L/Y)
harness connector
OK or NG SCIA4943E
OK >> GO TO 4.

Shift solenoid valve B F23 1 - Ground 5 - 20 Ω
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
SCIA3454E
5. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM A
OK or NG B
AT
Component Inspection ACS007T3
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

● For removal, refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . D
Resistance
E
Resistance
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid
1 Ground 5 - 20Ω F
valve B
SCIA2055E
H
Operation
I
SCIA2058E

DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR PFP:22620
Description ACS007T4
Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor is part of the system that controls throttle position. This system also
uses an electric throttle control actuator, which consists of a throttle control motor and throttle position sen-
sors. Accelerator pedal position signal is sent to the ECM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS007ZB
When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after warming up engine. Fully-closed throttle: 0.8V
THRTL POS SEN
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.) Fully-open throttle: 4.4V
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007T5

● Diagnostic trouble code “THROTTLE POSI SEN” with CONSULT-II or 3rd judgement flicker without CON-
SULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the ECM.
Possible Cause ACS007T6
Harness or connector
(The sensor circuit is open shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007T7
CAUTION:
WITH CONSULT-II
Accelerator pedal condition THRTL POS SEN
Fully released Approx. 0.8V
Partially depressed 0.8 - 4.4V
Fully depressed Approx. 4.4V

If the check result is OK, go to following step. SAT014K

consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal com-
pletely.
THRTL POS SEN: Approximately 3V or less
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive sec- SCIA5358E
onds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.

THRTL POS SEN: Wide open throttle

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. A
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
B
Selector lever position: “D” position
Vehicle speed: 10km/h (6MPH) or more
Throttle position: greater than 4.0/8 of the full throttle position AT
4. If the check result is NG, go to AT-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D

Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS ACS007T8
TCWB0010E

Judgement standard A
(Approx.)
When turning ignition switch to “ON”. 4.5 - 5.5V
32 L Sensor power B
When turning ignition switch to
0V
or “OFF”.
When depressing accelerator pedal Fully-closed throttle:
Accelerator pedal AT
slowly after warming up engine. 0.8V
41 G/Y position (APP)
(Voltage rises gradually in response Fully-open throttle:
sensor
to throttle position.) 4.4V
42 B Sensor ground Always 0V D
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007XB
1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM E

● Check DTC with CONSULT-II “ENGINE”.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-
II. Refer to EC-123, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-555, "DTC G
P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR" , EC-562, "DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR" and EC-578, "DTC
P2138 APP SENSOR" . If CAN communication line is detected, GO TO AT-95, "DTC U1000 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE" . H


With CONSULT-II
3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”.
When depressing accelera- Fully-closed throttle: 0.8V
tor pedal slowly after warm-
THRTL POS SEN ing up engine.
(Voltage rises gradually in Fully-open throttle: 4.4V
response to throttle position.)
SCIA4730E
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals.
Judgement
Terminal
(Wire color)
(Approx.)
When depressing accel-
erator pedal slowly after Fully-closed
TCM con- 41(G/Y) - warming up engine. throttle: 0.8V
F47
nector 42(B) (Voltage rises gradually Fully-open
in response to throttle throttle: 4.4V
position.)
SCIA4941E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sensor circuit.
3. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK TCM
OK or NG

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE PFP:31940

A
Description ACS007TA
Overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by TCM in response to signals sent from PNP switch, overdrive con-
trol switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Overrun clutch operation will then be controlled. B
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS007ZC
Item name Condition Display value AT

When overrun clutch solenoid valve operates. ON
OVERRUN/C S/V
When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not operate. OFF
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007TB

● Diagnostic trouble code “OVERRUN CLUTCH S/V” with CONSULT-II or 6th judgement flicker without E
CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate solenoid
valve.
Possible Cause ACS007TC
F

● Harness or connector G
● Overrun clutch solenoid valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007TD
H
CAUTION:
I
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of test. J
WITH CONSULT-II
K
2. Start engine. L
3. Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
with “D” position (OD ON).
4. Release accelerator pedal completely with “D” position (OD M
OFF).
SAT014K
WITH GST
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position (OD ON), vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH).

Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ACS007TE
TCWA0042E

Judgement stan- A
(Approx.)
When overrun clutch solenoid valve B
Battery voltage
operates.
Overrun clutch
20 L/B
solenoid valve When overrun clutch solenoid valve
0V AT
does not operate.
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007TF

D
With CONSULT-II
E
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “OVERRUN/C S/V” while driving. F
When overrun clutch solenoid valve operates. ON G
OVERRUN/C S/V When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not
OFF
operate.
H
SCIA3257E I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. J
Judgement K
Terminal
(Wire color)
(Approx.)
When overrun clutch Battery volt-
solenoid valve operates. age
L
TCM con- 20 (L/B) -
F46 When overrun clutch
nector Ground
solenoid valve does not 0V
operate. M
OK or NG SCIA3258E
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminal and ground.
Terminal Resistance
Overrun clutch solenoid 20 (L/B) -
F46 20 - 30 Ω
valve Ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SCIA3259E

Terminal
(Wire color)
TCM connector F46 20 (L/B)
F23 3 (L/B)
harness connector

SCIA3260E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

Overrun clutch solenoid
F23 3 - Ground 20 - 30 Ω
valve

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
SCIA4945E
5. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.

6. CHECK TCM A
OK or NG B
AT
Component Inspection ACS007TG
OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

● For removal, refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . D
Resistance
E
Resistance
(Approx.)
Overrun clutch
3 Ground 20 - 30Ω F
solenoid valve
SCIA2059E
H
Operation
I
SCIA2062E

DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR PFP:24814
Description ACS007TH
Vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into speedometer assembly. The sensor functions is an auxiliary device to
the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. TCM will then use a signal sent from vehicle speed sen-
sor·MTR.
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS007ZD

VHCL/S SE·MTR During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007TI
● This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item.

● Diagnostic trouble code “VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR” with CONSULT-II or 2nd judgement flicker without
CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
Possible Cause ACS007TJ

● Vehicle speed sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007TK
CAUTION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SAT014K
2. Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 16

MPH).
SCIA5358E
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. A
2. Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” and vehicle speed higher than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
B
AT

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ACS007TL
TCWB0012E

Judgement stan- A
(Approx.)
B
Voltage varies
Vehicle speed When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h between less
40 L/W
sensor (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. than 0V and
more than 4.5V AT
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007TM

D
With CONSULT-II
E
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving. F
Approximately matches G
VHCL/S SE·MTR During driving
the speedometer reading.
SCIA4730E I
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. J
Judgement K
Terminal
(Wire color)
(Approx.)
Voltage var-
When moving vehicle at ies between L
TCM con- 40(L/W) -
F47 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) less than 0V
nector Ground
for 1 m (3 ft) or more. and more
than 4.5V
M
OK or NG SCIA4940E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

● Harness for short or open between TCM and combination meter.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK TCM
OK or NG

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
POWER SOURCE) PFP:31940 A
Description ACS007TN
A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM. B
CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS007ZE
Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) AT

FLUID TEMP SE
D
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007TO

● Diagnostic trouble code “BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN” with CONSULT-II or 8th judgement flicker without E
CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
Possible Cause ACS008QL
F
Check the following items.
● Harness or connector (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● A/T fluid temperature sensor G
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007TP
CAUTION: H
at least 10 seconds before continuing. I
WITH CONSULT-II
J
1. Start engine.
K
M
SAT014K

VEHICLE SPEED: higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
SCIA5358E
WITH GST

POWER SOURCE)
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Selector lever: “D” position (OD ON)
Vehicle speed: higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH)

POWER SOURCE)
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ACS007TQ
AT
TCWB0011E

POWER SOURCE)
Judgement stan-
(Approx.)
19 BR/W Power source or Same as No. 10
Power source
(Memory back-up)
A/T fluid tempera-
47 BR
ture sensor When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F). 0.5V
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007TR
1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

Terminal
Item Connector Judgement standard (Approx.)
(Wire color)
10 (BR/W)
F46
TCM connector 19 (BR/W) Battery voltage
F47 28 (L)
SCIA2656E

Terminal
(Wire color)
10 (BR/W) 0V
F46
TCM connector 19 (BR/W) 0V
F47 28 (L) Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA2657E

● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM connector terminals 10, 19.
● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM connector terminal 28.
● 10A fuse (No.12, No.28, located in the fuse block)
● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

POWER SOURCE)
3. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
B
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Display value AT
Item name Condition
(Approx.)
FLUID TEMP SE D
SCIA4730E
F
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage TCM connector terminals while warming up A/T. G
Judge-
Terminal ment stan-
Item Connector Condition H
(Wire color) dard
(Approx.)
When ATF temperature
1.5V
TCM con- 47 (BR) - is 20°C (68°F). I
F47
nector 42 (B) When ATF temperature
0.5V
is 80°C (176°F).
OK or NG SCIA2658E
J
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 4.
K
L
● Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly harness connector
● Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

POWER SOURCE)
5. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

3. Check resistance between TCM connector terminals.
Terminal Tempera- Resistance
Item Connector
(Wire color) ture °C (°F) (Approx.)
20 (68) 2.5 KΩ
TCM connector F47 47 (BR) - 42 (B)
80 (176) 0.3 KΩ
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
SCIA4947E

nector terminals and TCM connector terminals.
Terminal
(Wire color)
F23 7 (B)
harness connector
TCM connector F47 47 (BR)
F23 6 (BR) SCIA2660E
harness connector
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

3. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness ter-
minals.
20 (68) 2.5 kΩ
80 (176) 0.3 kΩ
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SCIA4948E

POWER SOURCE)
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
– A/T fluid temperature sensor B
• Check resistance between terminal cord assembly harness ter-
minals while changing temperature as shown.
AT
20 (68) 2.5 kΩ
80 (176) 0.3 kΩ D
– Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SAT298F
9. CHECK DTC F

OK or NG G
NG >> GO TO 10.
H
10. CHECK TCM
I
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END J
Component Inspection ACS007TS
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR K

● For removal, refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and
Accumulators" .
● Check resistance between two terminals while changing temper- L
ature as shown at left.
M
20 (68) 2.5 kΩ
80 (176) 0.3 kΩ
SAT298F

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT PFP:00100
Description ACS007TT
When the power supply to TCM is cut off, for example because battery is removed, and the self-diagnostics
memory function stops, malfunction is detected.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007TU

● Diagnostic trouble code “INITIAL START” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM dose not receive the
voltage signal from the battery power supply.
● This is not a malfunction message. (Whenever shutting off a power supply to TCM, this message appears
on the screen.)
Possible Cause ACS007TV
Harness or connector
(Battery or ignition switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007TW
CAUTION:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Wait for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
SAT014K

Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ACS007TX
AT
TCWA0240E

Judgement stan-
(Approx.)
19 BR/W Power source or Same as No. 10
Power source
(Memory back-up)
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007TY
1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

Terminal
(Wire color)
10 (BR/W)
F46
F47 28 (L)
SCIA2656E

Terminal
(Wire color)
10 (BR/W) 0V
F46
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM connector terminals 10, 19
● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM connector terminal 28
● 10A fuse (No.12, No.28, located in the fuse block)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT A

3. Check continuity between TCM connector terminals and ground. B

TCM connector F47 25 (B), 48 (B) -Ground Yes AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power D
E
SCIA2671E
4. CHECK DTC
F
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END G
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK TCM H
OK or NG I
J

DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) PFP:31036
Description ACS007TZ
TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input

and output and for power supply. The unit controls A/T.
SAT574J
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007U0

● Diagnostic trouble code “CONTROL UNIT (RAM)”, “CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” with CONSULT-II is
detected when TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM).
Possible Cause ACS007U1
TCM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007U2
CAUTION:
WITH CONSULT-II
A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine.
SAT014K
3. Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.

SCIA5358E

DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007U3
1. CHECK DTC A
With CONSULT-II
B
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Touch “ERASE”.
3. Perform AT-198, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . AT
Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM)” or “CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again?
YES >> Replace TCM.
NO >> INSPECTION END D

DTC CONTROL UNIT(EEPROM)
DTC CONTROL UNIT(EEPROM) PFP:31036
Description ACS007U4
TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input

and output and for power supply. The unit controls A/T.
SAT574J
On Board Diagnosis Logic ACS007U5

● Diagnostic trouble code “CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory
(EEP ROM) is malfunctioning.
Possible Cause ACS007U6
TCM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS007U7
CAUTION:
WITH CONSULT-II
A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine.
SAT014K
3. Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.

SCIA5358E

DTC CONTROL UNIT(EEPROM)
Diagnostic Procedure ACS007U8
1. CHECK DTC A
With CONSULT-II
B
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position). AT
4. Touch “ERASE”.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF for 10 seconds.
Perform AT-200, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . D
See previous page.
Is the “CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again?
YES >> Replace TCM. E
NO >> INSPECTION END

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS PFP:00100
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ACS007U9
TCWB0013E

AT
TCWB0014E

Judgement stan-
dard (Approx.)
Battery voltage
26 BR/Y
0V
positions.
and Battery voltage
27 L
0V
positions.
30 G/B CONSULT- II (RX) — —
31 W CONSULT- II (TX) — —
Battery voltage
PNP switch “D” posi- position.
34 W/G
0V
positions.
Battery voltage
PNP switch “R” posi- position.
35 Y/G
and 0V
positions.
When setting selector lever to “N” or
Battery voltage
PNP switch “N” or “P” “P” position.
36 G
position When setting selector lever to other
0V
positions.

O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ACS007UA
A
SYMPTOM:
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to ON.
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE B
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-82, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Is a malfunction in CAN communication indicated in the results?
AT
YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-95, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE D

2. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. E
Refer to AT-195, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" .
Terminal
(Wire color) F
10 (BR/W)
F46
G
F47 28 (L)
SCIA2656E H

4. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. I
Terminal
(Wire color)
10 (BR/W) 0V J
F46
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA2657E L

Check the following. M
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM connector terminals 10, 19
● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM connector terminal 28
● 10A fuse (No.12, No. 28, located in the fuse block)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

3. Check continuity between TCM connector terminals and ground.
Refer to AT-195, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" .
TCM connector F47 25 (B), 48 (B) -Ground Yes
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
SCIA2671E

● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and combination meter
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Check before Engine Is Started" .
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output. Refer to AT-77, "TCM Terminals and Reference Value" .
OK or NG

Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” and “N” Position ACS007ZF
A
SYMPTOM:
● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.
● Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”, “2”, “1” or “R” position. B
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-82, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . AT
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch circuit?
YES >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-98, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL
POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . D
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH E

Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch har-
ness connector terminals. Refer to AT-202, "Wiring Diagram — AT
— NONDTC" . F
Lever position Connector terminal Continuity
“P”, “N” Yes
F24 1-2 G
Other positions No
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. H
3. CHECK CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT I
Check PNP switch again with control cable disconnected from man-
ual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to test group 2.
J
OK or NG
OK >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-252, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
NG >> 1. Check PNP switch (Refer to test group 2.) again after K
adjusting PNP switch (AT-264 ).
– If OK, INSPECTION END
L
– If NG, repair or replace PNP switch. Refer to AT-263,
"REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . SCIA3156E
4. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM M
Check starting system. Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .

OK or NG

In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward or Backward When Pushed ACS007ZG
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with selector lever in “P” position.
1. CHECK CONTROL CABLE
Check control cable. Refer to AT-253, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-252, "Adjustment of A/
T Position" .
SCIA3156E
2. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS

Check parking components. Refer to AT-272, "Components" and
AT-280, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
SAT282F

In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves ACS007ZH
A
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
1. CHECK CONTROL CABLE B
OK or NG
AT
OK >> GO TO 2.
T Position" .
D
E
SCIA3156E
2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL F
Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-17, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Refill ATF.
H
SAT638A
J
3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-272, "Components" .
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition K
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. L
NG >> GO TO 4.
SAT171B

1. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-280, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Forward clutch assembly. Refer to AT-331, "Forward and Overrun Clutches" .
– Overrun clutch assembly. Refer to AT-331, "Forward and Overrun Clutches" .
– Reverse clutch assembly. Refer to AT-320, "Reverse Clutch" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-58, "Check at Idle" .
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-77, "TCM Terminals and Reference Value" .
OK or NG

Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position ACS007ZI
A
SYMPTOM:
Large shock when shifting from “N” to “R” position.
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS B
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-82, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" or AT-91, "Diagnostic Proce-
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve, accelerator AT
pedal position (APP) sensor circuit?
YES >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-104, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT" , AT-155, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" or AT-172, "DTC P1705 D
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR" .
NO >> GO TO 2.
E
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-55, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. G
SAT494G
I
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . J
– Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot fil-
ter) K
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-299, "Oil Pump" .
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 4.
M
4. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK TCM
OK or NG

Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position ACS007ZJ
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting “R” position.
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.
SAT638A

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “R” position. Refer
to AT-55, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SAT494G

ter)
4. Check the following item:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK STALL REVOLUTION A

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “1” and “R” positions.
Refer to AT-52, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK in “1” position, NG in “R” position>> GO TO 5.
NG in both “1” and “R” positions>> GO TO 7. AT
D
SAT493G
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E

F
– Low & reverse brake assembly. Refer to AT-338, "Low & Reverse Brake" .
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 6.
H
2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition I
Check" .
OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
L
SAT171B

M
– High clutch assembly. Refer to AT-325, "High Clutch" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK TCM
OK or NG

Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D”, “2” or “1” Position ACS007ZK
A
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D”, “2” or “1” position.
1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL B
OK or NG
AT
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Refill ATF.
E
SAT638A
2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE F
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer
to AT-55, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. H
SAT494G
J
2. Check the following. K
ter)
– Line pressure solenoid valve L
4. Check the following item:
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK STALL REVOLUTION

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-
52, "STALL TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
SAT493G

– Forward one-way clutch. Refer to AT-342, "Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch
Hub" .
– Low one-way clutch. Refer to AT-280, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Torque converter. Refer to AT-280, "DISASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

2. Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition
Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 5.
SAT171B
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM
OK or NG

Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ACS007ZL
A
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on “Cruise Test — Part 1” and “Cruise Test — Part 2”
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM B
Check if vehicle creep in “R” position.
OK or NG
AT
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO AT-212, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position" .
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS D
E
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), overrun clutch solenoid
valve, torque converter clutch solenoid valve, shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit?
YES >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVO-
F
LUTION SENSOR)" , AT-177, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-142,
"DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-162, "DTC P0750
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-167, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" or AT-182,
"DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . G
NO >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR H

Check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. Refer to AT-172, "DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSI-
TION (APP) SENSOR" .
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor.
J
Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in “D” position.
K
Refer to AT-55, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. L
NG >> GO TO 5.
SAT494G


– Shift valve A
– Shift valve B
– Pilot valve
– Pilot filter
– Low one-way clutch. Refer to AT-280, "DISASSEMBLY" .
– Forward one-way clutch. Refer to AT-342, "Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch
Hub" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 5.
SAT171B

2. Check the following
– Shift valve A
– Shift valve B
– Pilot valve
– Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damage parts.

8. CHECK SYMPTOM A
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" and AT-63, "Cruise Test — Part 2" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END B
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK TCM AT
D
OK or NG

A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ACS007ZM
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed on “Cruise Test — Part 1”.
A/T does not shift from D4 to D2 when depressing accelerator pedal fully at the specified speed on
“Cruise Test — Part 2”.
1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check if vehicle creep forward in “D” position and vehicle can be started from D1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO AT-215, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D”, “2” or “1” Position" and AT-217, "Vehicle
Cannot Be Started From D1" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
T Position" .
SCIA3156E
3. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT

Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to AT-109,
"DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" and AT-182, "DTC VEHICLE
SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
circuits.
4. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. AT
SAT171B
E
1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" .
F
– Shift valve A
– Shift valve B G
– Pilot valve H
– Pilot filter
I
– Servo piston assembly
– Brake band J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K
1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-260, "Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators" . L
– Shift valve A
– Shift valve B M
– Pilot valve
– Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , AT-63, "Cruise Test — Part 2" .
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.

9. CHECK TCM
OK or NG

A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ACS007ZN
A
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed on “Cruise Test — Part 1” and “Cruise Test —
Part 2”.
B
Check symptom. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , AT-63, "Cruise Test — Part 2" .
Are “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D”, “2” or “1” Position” and “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ” AT
OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO AT-215, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D”, “2” or “1” Position" and AT-217, "Vehicle D
2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE E

OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 3.
T Position" .
G
H
SCIA3156E
3. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT I
"DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" and AT-182, "DTC VEHICLE J
SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
circuits.
4. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR L
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.


Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
SAT171B

– Shift valve B
– Pilot valve
– Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

– Shift valve B
– Pilot valve
– Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.

9. CHECK TCM A
OK or NG B
AT

A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ACS007ZO
SYMPTOM:
● A/T does not shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed on “Cruise Test — Part 1” and “Cruise Test
— Part 2”.
● A/T must be warm before D3 to D4 shift will occur.
Check symptom. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , AT-63, "Cruise Test — Part 2" .
Are “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D”, “2” or “1” Position” and “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ”
OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO AT-215, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D”, “2” or “1” Position" and AT-217, "Vehicle
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch, A/T fluid temperature sensor, vehicle speed sensor·A/T
(revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A or B, vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit?
YES >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-98, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP)
SWITCH" , AT-104, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-109,
"DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-162, "DTC P0750
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-167, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" or AT-182,
"DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
NO >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
SAT171B


– Shift valve A B
– Overrun clutch control valve
AT
– Overrun clutch solenoid valve
– Pilot valve
– Pilot filter D
– Servo piston assembly E
– Brake band
– Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-299, "Oil Pump" . F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G

H
– Shift valve A I
– Pilot valve J
– Pilot filter
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK SYMPTOM L
OK or NG M
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK TCM
OK or NG

A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up ACS007ZP
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed on “Cruise Test — Part 1”.
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), A/T fluid temperature sen-
sor, vehicle speed sensor·MTR, engine speed signal, torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit?
YES >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVO-
LUTION SENSOR)" , AT-104, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-
182, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" , AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL"
or AT-142, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

– Torque converter relief valve
– Pilot valve
– Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" .
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK TCM
OK or NG

A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition ACS007ZQ
A
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds on “Cruise Test — Part 1”.
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS B
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate engine speed signal? AT
YES >> Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .
NO >> GO TO 2.
D

E
Check" .
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
G
H
SAT171B
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I

– Torque converter clutch control valve J
– Pilot valve
K
– Pilot filter
4. Check the following. L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 5.

– Pilot valve
– Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK TCM
OK or NG

Lock-Up Is Not Released ACS007ZR
A
SYMPTOM:
Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released on “Cruise Test — Part 1”.
1. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR CIRCUIT B
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit? AT
YES >> Check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit. Refer to AT-172, "DTC P1705 ACCELER-
ATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR" .
NO >> GO TO 2. D
2. CHECK SYMPTOM
E
OK or NG
F
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK TCM
G
OK or NG H
I

Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ) ACS007ZS
SYMPTOM:
Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T shifts from D4 to D3 on “Cruise Test — Part
1”.
Do the self-diagnosis results indicate overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit?
YES >> Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT-177, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

Check" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SAT171B

– Overrun clutch reducing valve
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.


– Overrun clutch control valve B
– Overrun clutch reducing valve
AT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
D
6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test — Part 1" . E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7. F
7. CHECK TCM
1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-77, "TCM Terminals and Reference Value" . G
OK or NG
H
I

A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”
ACS007UP
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D4 to D3 when changing overdrive control switch to “OFF” position on
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-82, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" or AT-91, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure Without CONSULT-II" .
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine)
3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SW”.
Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated
properly.
(Overdrive switch “ON” displayed on CONSULT-II means over-
drive “OFF”.)
Overdrive control switch
Item name Display value
Condition
ON OFF SCIA4730E
OVERDRIVE SW
OFF ON
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between A/T device harness connector terminal
and ground. Refer to AT-202, "Wiring Diagram — AT — NON-
DTC" .
Overdrive con-
Terminal Data
Item Connector trol switch Condi-
tion
A/T device Battery volt-

1 (L/OR) - Releasing
harness con- M58 age
Ground
nector Holding 0V
OK or NG SCIA5336E
OK >> GO TO AT-223, "A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .

NG >> Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-244, "TCM Self-Diagnosis Does Not Activate" .

A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position ACS007UQ
A
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D3 to 22 when changing selector lever from “D” to “2” position on “Cruise
Test — Part 3”.
B
Check symptom. Refer to AT-64, "Cruise Test — Part 3" .
Is “A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ” OK? AT
YES (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2.
YES (Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO AT-220, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . D
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)

E
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for F
3. Read out “P·N”, “R”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving
G
ON H
PN POSI SW
OFF
other positions.
SAT701J I
ON
“R” position.
R POSITION SW
OFF
other positions. J
ON
“D” position.
D POSITION SW
When setting selector lever to K
OFF
other positions.
ON
“2” position. L
2 POSITION SW
OFF
other positions.
ON
M
“1” position.
1 POSITION SW
OFF
other positions.
OK or NG
NG >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to AT-98, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL
POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" .


Without CONSULT-II
while moving selector lever through each position. Refer to AT-
202, "Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC" .
Terminal
Lever position
36 35 34 27 26
“P”, “N” B 0 0 0 0
“R” 0 B 0 0 0
“D” 0 0 B 0 0
“2” 0 0 0 B 0
“1” 0 0 0 0 B
B: Battery voltage
0: 0V
OK or NG
NG >> Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer
to AT-98, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
(PNP) SWITCH" .
SCIA5587E

A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever “2” → “1” on Position ACS007UR
A
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from 22 to 11 when changing selector lever from “2” to “1” position on “Cruise
Test — Part 3”.
B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) AT
D
Item name Condition Display value E
ON
PN POSI SW
When setting selector lever to F
OFF
other positions.
SAT701J
ON
“R” position.
R POSITION SW G
OFF
other positions.
When setting selector lever to H
ON
“D” position.
D POSITION SW
OFF
other positions.
I
ON
“2” position.
2 POSITION SW
When setting selector lever to J
OFF
other positions.
ON
“1” position.
1 POSITION SW K
OFF
other positions.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . M


Without CONSULT-II
Terminal
Lever position
36 35 34 27 26
“P”, “N” B 0 0 0 0
“R” 0 B 0 0 0
“D” 0 0 B 0 0
“2” 0 0 0 B 0
“1” 0 0 0 0 B
B: Battery voltage
0: 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
(PNP) SWITCH" .
SCIA5587E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
T Position" .
SCIA3156E

SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
circuits.

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A

Check" . B
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. AT
SAT171B
E
F
– Shift valve A
– Shift solenoid valve A G
3. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-280, "DISASSEMBLY" . H
I
– Brake band
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. J
7. CHECK SYMPTOM
K
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END L
NG >> GO TO 8.
SAT778B
8. CHECK TCM
OK or NG

Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake ACS007US
SYMPTOM:
● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting from 22 (12 ) to 11 “Cruise Test — Part
3”.
● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when turning overdrive control switch OFF on
● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting A/T from “D” to “2” position on “Cruise
Test — Part 3”.
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-82, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" or AT-91, "Diagnostic Pro-
cedure Without CONSULT-II" .
NO >> GO TO 2.

With CONSULT-II
Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated
properly.
drive “OFF”.)
Condition
ON OFF SCIA4730E
OVERDRIVE SW
OFF ON
Without CONSULT-II
and ground. Refer to AT-202, "Wiring Diagram — AT — NON-
DTC" .
Overdrive con-
Terminal Data
Item Connector trol switch Condi-
tion
A/T device Battery volt-

1 (L/OR) - Releasing
harness con- M58 age
Ground
nector Holding 0V
OK or NG SCIA5336E
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4.
NG >> Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-244, "TCM Self-Diagnosis Does Not Activate" .

3. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) A

With CONSULT-II
B
selector lever to each position. AT

ON D
PN POSI SW
OFF
other positions. E
SAT701J
ON
“R” position.
R POSITION SW
When setting selector lever to F
OFF
other positions.
ON
“D” position.
D POSITION SW G
OFF
other positions.
When setting selector lever to H
ON
“2” position.
2 POSITION SW
OFF
other positions.
I
ON
“1” position.
1 POSITION SW
OFF J
other positions.
OK or NG
K
OK >> GO TO 5.
L


Without CONSULT-II
Terminal
Lever position
36 35 34 27 26
“P”, “N” B 0 0 0 0
“R” 0 B 0 0 0
“D” 0 0 B 0 0
“2” 0 0 0 B 0
“1” 0 0 0 0 B
B: Battery voltage
0: 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
(PNP) SWITCH" .
SCIA0777E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
T Position" .
SCIA3156E

SPEED SENSOR MTR" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
circuits.

7. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR A

OK or NG B
OK >> GO TO 8.
AT
D
Check" .
OK or NG
E
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
G
SAT171B

H
– Shift valve A I
3. Disassemble A/T. Refer to.
J
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L
10. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. Refer to AT-64, "Cruise Test — Part 3" . M
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK TCM

OK or NG

TCM Self-Diagnosis Does Not Activate ACS007UT
SYMPTOM:
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even if the lamp circuit is
good.
DESCRIPTION
● PNP switch
PNP switch assembly includes a transaxle position switch. The
transaxle position switch detects the selector lever position and
sends a signal to the TCM.
SCIA0752E
● Overdrive control switch

Overdrive control switch detects the switch position (ON or OFF)
and sends a signal to the TCM.
SCIA5418E
● Closed throttle position signal and wide open throttle position

signal
ECM judges throttle opening based on a signal from accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor, and sends the signal via CAN com-
munication to TCM.
PBIB0498E

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
A
Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-82, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" .
Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? B
NO (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2.
NO (Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3. AT

D
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for E
F
ON
“N” or “P” position. G
PN POSI SW
OFF
other positions.
SAT701J H
ON
“R” position.
R POSITION SW
OFF
other positions. I
ON
“D” position.
D POSITION SW
When setting selector lever to J
OFF
other positions.
ON
“2” position. K
2 POSITION SW
OFF
other positions.
When setting selector lever to L
ON
“1” position.
1 POSITION SW
OFF
other positions. M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.


Without CONSULT-II
Terminal
Lever position
36 35 34 27 26
“P”, “N” B 0 0 0 0
“R” 0 B 0 0 0
“D” 0 0 B 0 0
“2” 0 0 0 B 0
“1” 0 0 0 0 B
B: Battery voltage
0: 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
(PNP) SWITCH" .
SCIA5587E
4. CHECK PNP SWITCH

2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
nals.
“P” 1 - 2, 3 - 7 Yes
should not
“N” 1 - 2, 3 - 9 exist in posi-
F24
than the
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT

Check PNP switch again with control cable disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to test
group 4.
OK or NG
OK >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-252, "Adjustment of A/T Position" .
NG >> Repair or replace PNP switch.


● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP) switch
● Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM B
● Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and combination meter
● Harness for short or open between combination meter and TCM
AT
● 10A fuse (NO.12, located in the fuse block)
● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

With CONSULT-II F
“A/T” with CONSULT-II. G
Check the signal of overdrive control switch is indicated prop-
erly. H
drive “OFF”.)
I
condition
ON OFF SCIA4730E
OVERDRIVE SW J
OFF ON
Without CONSULT-II K
and ground. Refer to AT-202, "Wiring Diagram — AT — NON- L
DTC" .
Terminal Overdrive control Data
Item Connector
(Wire color) switch condition (Approx.) M
A/T device Battery
Releasing
harness con- voltage
1 (L/OR) -
nector (Over- M58
Ground
drive control Holding 0V
switch)
SCIA5336E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.

8. CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH

2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T device harness connector termi-
nals. Refer to AT-202, "Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC" .
Overdrive control
Item Connector Terminal Continuity
switch condition
A/T device har- Releasing No
ness connector
M58 1-2
(Overdrive control Holding Yes
switch)
OK or NG

● Harness for short or open between combination meter and A/T device harness connector
● Harness for short or open between A/T device harness connector and ground
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.
Check the signal of throttle position signal is indicated properly.
SCIA4731E
Data monitor
Accelerator pedal condition
CLOSED THL/SW W/O THRL/P-SW
Released ON OFF
Fully depressed OFF ON

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. A
NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
● Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. Refer to AT-172, "DTC P1705 ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR" . B
11. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

AT
Without CONSULT-II
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-91, "Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II" .
OK or NG
D
NG − 1 >> Self-diagnosis does not activate: GO TO 12.
NG − 2 >> DTC is displayed: Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-91, "Diagnostic Procedure With-
out CONSULT-II" . E
12. CHECK TCM

F
OK or NG G
COMPONENT INSPECTION H
Overdrive Control Switch
● Check continuity between A/T device harness connector termi-
nals. I
Overdrive control
Item Connector Terminal Continuity
switch condition
J
A/T device har- Releasing No
ness connector
M58 1-2
(Overdrive control Holding Yes
switch) K
SCIA5330E
L
PNP Switch
nals.
M
“P” 1 - 2, 3 - 7 Yes
should not
“N” 1 - 2, 3 - 9 exist in posi-
F24
than the

2. If NG, check again with control cable disconnected from manual

shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.
3. If OK on step 2, adjust control cable. Refer to AT-252, "Adjust-
ment of A/T Position" .
4. If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check conti-
nuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
5. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-263, "Park/Neu-
tral Position (PNP) Switch" .
6. If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.
SCIA3156E

SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:34901

A
Control Device Removal and Installation ACS007OQ
CONTROL DEVICE COMPONENTS

B
AT
SCIA5398E
J
1. Selector button 2. Return spring 3. Selector lever knob
4. Overdrive control switch 5. Shift lock release button cap 6. Position indicator plate
7. Park position switch 8. A/T device harness connector 9. Control device assembly K
10. Shift lock solenoid assembly 11. Position lamp

CONTROL CABLE COMPONENTS
SCIA5375E
1. Control device assembly 2. Lock plate 3. Bracket

4. Control cable 5. Bracket 6. Transaxle
7. Lock plate 8. Bracket 9. Floor panel
REMOVAL
1. Remove A/T control finisher. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
2. Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
3. Remove cluster lid finisher. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
4. Disconnect control cable of control device assembly.
5. Disconnect key interlock cable of control device assembly. Refer to AT-258, "KEY INTERLOCK CABLE" .
7. Remove control device assembly from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
● After installation is completed, adjust and check A/T position. Refer to AT-252, "Adjustment of A/T Posi-
tion" and AT-253, "Checking of A/T Position" .
Adjustment of A/T Position ACS007OR
Move selector lever from “P” position to “1” position. You should be
able to feel the detents in each position. If the detents cannot be felt
or if the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the con-
trol cable needs adjustment.
1. Place selector lever in “P” position.
2. Loosen control cable lock nut and place manual shaft in “P”
position.
CAUTION:
Turn wheels more than 1/4 rotations and apply the park
lock.
SCIA3157E
3. After pushing the control cable with the specified force, move
your hands off the control cable.
Specified force: 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb)
4. Connect control cable on manual shaft.
CAUTION:
No application of a force to the manual lever.

5. Tighten control cable lock nut.

6. Move selector lever from “P” to “1” position again. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly. A
7. Apply grease to contacting areas of selector lever and control cable. Install any part removed.
Checking of A/T Position ACS007OS
B
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Make sure selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
make sure selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed. AT
3. Move selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Confirm selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the
positions. Check whether or not the actual position selector lever is in matches the position shown by the D
shift position indicator and transaxle body.
5. The method of operating selector lever to individual positions
correctly should be as shown in the figure. E
6. Confirm back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in
“R” position. Confirm back-up lamps do not illuminate when
selector lever is in “P” or “N” position with selector lever pushed
F
against “R” position.
7. Confirm engine can only be started with selector lever in “P” and
“N” positions.
G
8. Make sure transaxle is locked completely in “P” position.
SCIA5443E

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM PFP:34950
Description ACS007UU
● The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:

With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other posi-
tion unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
● The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock sole-
noid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder.
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ACS007UV
SCIA5429E

Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ACS007UW
AT
TCWB0015E

Diagnostic Procedure ACS007UX
SYMPTOM 1:
● Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal
applied.
● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released.
● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
● Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position.
● Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P”.
1. CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Check key interlock cable for damage.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair key interlock cable. Refer to AT-258, "KEY INTERLOCK CABLE" .
2. CHECK A/T POSITION

Check A/T position. Refer to AT-253, "Checking of A/T Position" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-252, "Adjustment of A/T Position" .
3. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AND PARK POSITION SWITCH

2. Selector lever is set in “P” position.
3. Check operation sound.
Condition Brake pedal Operation sound
When ignition switch is turned ON posi- Depressed Yes
tion and selector lever is set in “P” posi-
tion. Released No
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK POWER SOURCE

and ground.
Voltage:
Brake pedal depressed: Battery voltage
Brake pedal released: 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 5.
SCIA5337E

5. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH A

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector B
terminals.
Condition Continuity
AT
When brake pedal is depressed Yes
When brake pedal is released No
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to D

BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. E
SCIA2126E
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F
Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
1. Harness for short or open between ignition switch and stop lamp switch harness connector G
2. Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch harness connector and A/T device harness connec-
tor
3. 10A fuse [No.5, located in the fuse block (J/B)] H
4. Ignition switch. Refer to PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END I
7. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT J

K
3. Check continuity between A/T device harness connector termi-
nal and ground.
Continuity should exist. L
4. Connect A/T device harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace shift lock solenoid or park position switch. M
SCIA5000E

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE PFP:34908
Components ACS007UY
SCIA5607E
CAUTION:
● Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or inter-
ference with adjacent parts.
● After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are
firmly secured in their positions.
Removal ACS007UZ
1. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster

holder and remove interlock rod from key interlock cable.
SCIA5608E

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
2. Remove lock plate from steering lock assembly and remove key
interlock cable. A
AT
SCIA5609E
D
Installation ACS007V0
1. Turn ignition switch lock position.

2. Set selector lever to “P” position. E
3. Set key interlock cable to steering lock assembly and install lock
plate.
4. Clamp key interlock cable to steering column and fix to key inter- F
lock cable with band.
SCIA5609E
H
5. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.
K
SCIA5611E
6. Install casing cap to bracket.

L
7. Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod.
SCIA5612E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE PFP:00000
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators ACS007V1
COMPONENTS
SCIA4320E
1. Transaxle 2. Lip seal 3. O-ring

4. Servo release accumulator piston 5. O-ring 6. Return spring
7. Control valve assembly 8. Oil pan gasket 9. Drain plug gasket
10. Drain plug 11. Magnet 12. Oil pan
13. Oil pan fitting bolt 14. Snap ring 15. O-ring
16. O-ring 17. N-D accumulator piston 18. O-ring
19. Return spring
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Removal
1. Disconnect battery negative cable from battery negative terminal.
2. Drain ATF from transaxle. Refer to AT-18, "Changing A/T Fluid" .
3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
SAT992C

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
4. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector.

A
5. Remove snap ring from terminal body.
CAUTION:
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
B
AT
SCIA4853E
D
6. Remove terminal cord assembly by pushing terminal body into
transaxle case.
E
G
SCIA5613E
7. Remove control valve assembly fixing bolts A, B and C . H

Bolt length, number and location:
Bolt symbol A B C
I
Bolt length “ ” mm (in)
40.0 (1.575) 33.0 (1.299) 43.5 (1.713)
Number of bolts 5 6 2 J
AAT260A
8. Remove control valve assembly from transaxle.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop manual valve and servo release accumulator return spring.

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
9. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop manual valve.
10. Remove O-ring from terminal body.
11. Disassemble and inspect control valve assembly if necessary.
Refer to AT-304, "Control Valve Assembly" , AT-313, "Control
Valve Upper Body" and AT-317, "Control Valve Lower Body" .
SCIA3150E
12. Remove servo release accumulator piston and N-D accumulator

piston by applying compressed air if necessary.
CAUTION:
Hold each piston with a rag.
SCIA4854E
a. Blow air into the oil hole as shown in the figure and remove
servo release accumulator piston from transaxle case.
CAUTION:
● Strong flow of air will push the accumulator piston out
along with a splash of oil. Cover the area with paper tow-
els and blow air little by little to avoid this.
● Wrap the removed accumulator piston in a paper towel.
b. Remove O-rings from servo release accumulator piston.
SAT019DA
c. Blow air into the oil hole shown in the figure and remove N-D
accumulator piston and return spring from transaxle case.
CAUTION:
● Strong flow of air will push the accumulator piston out
along with a splash of oil. Cover the area with paper tow-
els and blow air little by little to avoid this.
d. Remove O-rings from N-D accumulator piston.

13. Remove lip seals from oil groove for band servo.
14. Remove magnets from oil pan. SAT020D

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Installation
● Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. A
● Set manual shaft in “N” position, then align manual plate
with groove in manual valve.
● After installing control valve assembly to transaxle case, B
make sure that selector lever can be moved to all positions.
● After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage,
and fluid level. Refer to AT-17, "Checking A/T Fluid". AT
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-rings and lip seals.
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan fitting bolts. D
● Do not reuse drain plug gasket. SAT497H
● Apply ATF to manual valve.

E
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface.
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch ACS007V2
COMPONENTS F
SCIA4855E
L
1. Transaxle assembly 2. PNP switch

Removal M
1. Set selector lever in “N” position.
2. Remove engine under cover.
3. Remove control cable end from manual shaft.
SCIA3156E

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
4. Remove PNP switch fitting bolts.

5. Remove PNP switch from transaxle assembly.
SCIA3154E
Installation
● Align PNP switch position when installing.
● After installation is completed, adjust and check A/T position. Refer to AT-251, "SHIFT CONTROL SYS-
TEM" , AT-264, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ADJUSTMENT" .
● After installation is completed, check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-244, "TCM Self-Diagnosis
Does Not Activate" .
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
1. Set selector lever and manual shaft in “N” position.
2. Remove control cable end from manual shaft.
SCIA3156E
3. Loosen PNP switch fitting bolts.

4. Use a 3 mm (0.12 in) pin for this adjustment.
a. Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole.
b. Rotate PNP switch until the pin can also be inserted straight into
the hole in PNP switch.
5. Tighten PNP switch fixing bolts.
6. Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting PNP switch.
8. Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-252, "Adjustment of A/T Posi-
tion" . SCIA3154E
9. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-249, "PNP Switch" .

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement ACS007V3
COMPONENTS A
AT
SCIA4970E G
1. Transaxle assembly 2. LH differential side oil seal 3. RH differential side oil seal

H
Removal
1. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove drive shaft. Refer to FAX-13, "FRONT DRIVE SHAFT" . I
3. Remove transfer assembly from right side of transaxle (For AWD models). Refer to TF-48, "Removal and
Installation" .
4. Remove differential side oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver. J
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transaxle case.
K
SCIA4857E
M

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Installation
1. Drive the differential side oil seals into the case until it become
flush using the drift below. Refer to dimensions A and B.
Unit: mm (in)
Dimensions A, B 0± 0.5 (0±0.020)
NOTE:
The differential side oil seal pulling direction is used as the refer-
ence.
SCIA5614E
SCIA5615E
Drift to be used:
Location 2WD models AWD models
Transaxle case side (Left)
ST33400001 ST33400001
Tool number
(J-26082) (J-26082)
(Kent-Moore No.)
Converter housing side (Right)
ST33400001 KV40100621
Tool number
(J-26082) (J-25273)
(Kent-Moore No.)
SCIA4739E
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to differential side oil seals.
● Do not reuse differential side oil seals.

CAUTION:
If lubricant leak has occurred, after finishing work, check A/T fluid level and fluid leakage. Refer to
AT-17, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Replacement ACS007V4
COMPONENTS A
AT
SCIA4864E G
1. Transaxle assembly 2. Revolution sensor 3. O-ring

H
Removal
1. Remove front tire LH from vehicle with power tool.
2. Disconnect revolution sensor harness connector. I
3. Remove revolution sensor from transaxle assembly.
4. Remove O-ring from revolution sensor.
J
SCIA2788E
L
Installation
CAUTION: M
● Do not reuse O-ring.
● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE PFP:31098
Removal and Installation ACS007ZW
SCIA5346E
During removal and installation of air breather hose be careful of the following.
● Secure a mark “A” when installing air breather hose to resona-
tor.
SCIA5616E
● Secure a mark “B” when installing air breather hose to air

cleaner case.
SCIA5617E
CAUTION:
● When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bend-
ing the hose.
● When inserting a hose to the transaxle tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the tube
bend R portion.
● When inserting a hose to the air breather tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the
tube spool portion.

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY PFP:32020

A
Removal and Installation ACS007V5
COMPONENTS
B
AT
SCIA5618E
K
1. Transfer assembly 2. A/T fluid level gauge 3. A/T fluid charging pipe
4. O-ring 5. Center member 6. Front engine mounting insulator
L
7. Grommet 8. Fluid cooler tube 9. Fluid cooler tube
10. Copper washer 11. Copper washer 12. Transaxle assembly
13. Stopper 14. LH engine mounting insulator
M
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before separating transaxle from engine, remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from cylinder
block. Be careful not to damage sensor.
1. Remove battery and bracket, air cleaner and air duct.
2. Remove air breather hose. Refer to AT-268, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Disconnect terminal cord assembly harness connector, PNP switch harness connector and revolution
sensor harness connector.
4. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from cylinder block. Refer to EM-22, "OIL PAN AND OIL
STRAINER" .
CAUTION:
● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
● Do not disassemble.
● Do not allow metal filings, etc., to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.
● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism.

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
5. Disconnect control cable from transaxle assembly. Refer to AT-

252, "CONTROL CABLE COMPONENTS" .
6. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Instal-
lation" .
7. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler hoses.
8. Remove front drive shaft. Refer to FAX-13, "FRONT DRIVE
SHAFT" .
9. Remove transfer assembly. (For AWD models) Refer to TF-48,
"Removal and Installation" .
10. Remove starter motor with power tool. Refer to SC-16, ATM0479D
"Removal and Installation" .
11. Support transaxle assembly with a transmission jack.
12. Remove center member, front engine mounting insulator and LH
engine mounting insulator with power tool.
13. Remove suspension member. Refer to FSU-17, "Removal and
Installation" .
SCIA5619E
14. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-22, "OIL PAN AND OIL
STRAINER" .
Rotate crankshaft to gain access to securing bolts.
15. Remove securing bolts between drive plate and torque con-
verter. When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from
the front of engine.
16. Support engine assembly with a transmission jack.
17. Remove bolts fixing transaxle assembly to engine assembly.
18. Lower transaxle assembly while supporting it with a transmis-
sion jack. SCIA5620E
19. Remove A/T fluid level gauge from A/T fluid charging pipe.
20. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe from transaxle assembly.
21. Remove O-ring from A/T fluid charging pipe.
INSPECTION
Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter
● After inserting a torque converter to a transaxle, be sure to
check dimension “A” to ensure it is within the reference value
limit.
Distance “A”: 14 mm (0.55 in) or more
SCIA5621E

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of the removal, while paying attention to the following work. A
● When installing transaxle assembly to engine assembly, attach the fixing bolts in accordance with the fol-
lowing table.
B
2WD models
Bolt No. 1 2 3 4 5
Number of bolts 4 2 2 1 1 AT
Bolt length
49 (1.93) 40 (1.57) 30 (1.18) 40 (1.57) 45 (1.77)
“ ”mm (in)
Tightening torque D
75 (7.7,55) 42.7(4.4,31) 35(3.6,26)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
E
SCIA1144E
AWD models F
Bolt No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Number of bolts 4 1 2 2 1 1
G
Bolt length 49 45 40 30 40 45
“ ”mm (in) (1.93) (1.77) (1.57) (1.18) (1.57) (1.77)
Tightening torque H
75 (7.7,55) 42.7(4.4,31) 35(3.6,26)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
SCIA5622E I
● Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of
torque converter, and temporarily tighten bolts. Then, tighten the J
bolts to specified torque.
: 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)
K
CAUTION:
● When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed
from the front of engine.
L
● When tightening the tightening bolts for torque converter
after fixing crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to confirm the
tightening torque of crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. SCIA3138E
M
● After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and make sure that
transaxle rotates freely without binding.
● After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage, A/T fluid level, and the positions of A/T. Refer to
AT-17, "Checking A/T Fluid" , AT-252, "Adjustment of A/T Position" .

OVERHAUL
OVERHAUL PFP:00000
Components ACS007V7
SCIA5647E

OVERHAUL
1. Differential side bearing 2. Pinion mate gear thrust washer 3. Pinion mate gear
4. Pinion mate shaft 5. Lock pin 6. Side gear
A
7. Side gear thrust washer 8. Differential side bearing 9. Differential case
10. Final gear 11. Differential side bearing adjusting 12. Plug
shim B
13. O-ring 14. RH differential side oil seal 15. Torque converter
16. Converter housing 17. Differential lubricant tube 18. Clip
19. O-ring 20. Oil pump housing oil seal 21. Oil pump housing AT
22. O-ring 23. Outer gear 24. Inner gear
25. Oil pump cover 26. Oil pump assembly 27. Seal ring
28. Gasket D

OVERHAUL
SCIA5648E
1. Snap ring 2. Retaining plate 3. Driven plate

4. Dish plate 5. Snap ring 6. Spring retainer
7. Return spring 8. Reverse clutch piston 9. Seal ring

OVERHAUL
10. D-ring 11. Reverse clutch drum 12. Thrust washer

13. Reverse clutch assembly 14. Drive plate 15. Needle bearing A
16. Bearing race 17. Front sun gear 18. Needle bearing
19. High clutch hub 20. Needle bearing 21. Snap ring
22. Retaining plate 23. Driven plate 24. Snap ring B
25. Spring retainer 26. D-ring 27. D-ring
28. High clutch piston 29. Input shaft assembly (high clutch 30. Seal ring
drum) AT
31. Needle bearing 32. Bearing race 33. High clutch assembly
34. Return spring 35. Drive plate 36. Needle bearing
37. Overrun clutch hub 38. Thrust washer 39. Bearing race D
40. Forward one-way clutch 41. Bearing race 42. Forward clutch hub
43. Thrust washer 44. Rear internal gear 45. Needle bearing
46. Rear planetary carrier 47. Rear sun gear 48. Front planetary carrier E
52. Low & reverse brake piston 53. Retainer 54. Snap ring
55. Low one-way clutch 56. Snap ring 57. Needle bearing F
58. Needle bearing 59. Forward clutch drum 60. Forward clutch piston
61. Seal ring 62. D-ring 63. Spring retainer
64. Snap ring 65. Dish plate 66. Driven plate G
67. Retaining plate 68. Snap ring 69. Dish plate
70. Retaining plate 71. Driven plate 72. Retaining plate
H
73. Retaining plate 74. Snap ring 75. Forward clutch assembly and over-
run clutch assembly
76. Drive plate 77. Drive plate 78. Return spring
79. Overrun clutch piston 80. D-ring 81. Seal ring I
82. Retaining plate 83. Driven plate 84. Low & reverse brake assembly
85. Snap ring 86. Retaining plate 87. Dish plate
88. Drive plate J

OVERHAUL
SCIA5649E
1. Side cover fitting bolt 2. Output shaft bearing 3. Output shaft

4. Seal ring 5. Needle bearing 6. Parking actuator support
7. LH differential side oil seal 8. O-ring 9. Revolution sensor

OVERHAUL
10. Bracket 11. Anchor end pin 12. Lock nut

13. Transaxle case 14. Brake band 15. Bearing retainer A
16. Seal ring 17. Radial needle bearing 18. Snap ring
19. Reduction pinion gear 20. Reduction pinion gear bearing inner 21. Reduction pinion gear bearing outer
race race B
22. Strut 23. O-ring 24. O-ring
25. Servo release accumulator piston 26. O-ring 27. Return spring
28. Control valve assembly 29. Oil pan gasket 30. Drain plug gasket AT
31. Drain plug 32. Magnet 33. Oil pan
34. Oil pan fitting bolt 35. Low & reverse brake tube 36. Oil sleeve
37. O-ring 38. Snap ring 39. O-ring D
40. N-D accumulator piston 41. Return spring 42. Lip seal
43. Parking rod 44. Retaining pin 45. Manual shaft oil seal
46. Detent spring 47. Manual shaft 48. Retaining pin E
49. Manual plate 50. Parking rod plate 51. O/D servo piston
52. O/D servo piston retainer 53. O/D servo piston retainer fitting bolt 54. O-ring
55. D-ring 56. Servo piston retainer 57. O-ring F
58. E-ring 59. Spring retainer 60. O/D servo return spring
61. D-ring 62. Band servo piston 63. Band servo thrust washer
64. Band servo piston stem 65. 2nd servo return spring 66. Parking pawl G
67. Parking shaft 68. Return spring 69. Parking pawl spacer
70. PNP switch 71. Idler gear bearing 72. Idler gear
H
73. Idler gear lock nut 74. Reduction pinion gear adjusting 75. Output shaft adjusting shim
shim
76. Side cover
I

OVERHAUL
Oil Channel ACS007V8
SCIA5650E

OVERHAUL
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap

Rings ACS007V9
A
AT
SCIA5660E

DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY PFP:31020
Disassembly ACS007VA
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.

2. Remove drain plug gasket from drain plug.
SCIA0003E
3. Remove torque converter.
SAT008D
4. Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as

shown in the right figure.
a. Insert check tool into groove of bearing support built into one-
way clutch outer race.
b. When fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one-way
clutch spline using screwdriver.
c. Make sure that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace
torque converter assembly.
SAT009D

DISASSEMBLY
5. Set manual shaft to “P” position.

6. Remove PNP switch. A
7. Remove bracket from transaxle case.
8. Remove revolution sensor from transaxle case.
B
9. Remove O-ring from revolution sensor.
AT
SCIA3154E
D
10. Remove oil pan fitting bolts.
11. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
12. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of E
malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or con-
tains foreign particles, frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates
F
varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches
to stick and can inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to AT-18, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" . G
13. Remove magnets from oil pan.
SCIA3476E
14. Remove control valve assembly according to the following pro-
H
cedures.
a. Remove snap ring from terminal body.
CAUTION:
I
SCIA4866E
b. Push terminal body into transaxle case and draw out terminal L
cord assembly.
SCIA0801E

DISASSEMBLY
c. Remove control valve assembly fixing bolts A , B and C .

Bolt symbol A B C
Bolt length “ ” mm (in)

40.0 (1.575) 33.0 (1.299) 43.5 (1.713)
Number of bolts 5 6 2
AAT260A
15. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop manual valve.
16. Remove O-ring from terminal body.
SAT005F
17. Remove return spring from servo release accumulator piston.
SCIA3477E

DISASSEMBLY
18. Remove servo release accumulator piston with compressed air.

CAUTION: A
● Strong flow of air will push accumulator piston out along
with a splash of oil. Cover the area with paper towels and
blow air little by little to avoid this. B
AT
SAT019DA
D
19. Remove O-rings from servo release accumulator piston.
20. Remove N-D accumulator piston and return spring with com-
pressed air. E
CAUTION:
● Strong flow of air will push accumulator piston out along
with a splash of oil. Cover the area with paper towels and
F
blow air little by little to avoid this.
21. Remove O-rings from N-D accumulator piston. G
SAT020D
H
22. Check accumulator pistons and contact surface of transaxle
case for damage.
23. Check return springs for damage and free length. I
K
SAT023DA
24. Remove lip seals from oil groove for band servo.
L
SCIA4867E

DISASSEMBLY
25. Remove low & reverse brake tube and oil sleeve.
SCIA4868E
26. Remove converter housing according to the following proce-

dures.
a. Remove converter housing mounting bolts.
b. Remove converter housing by lightly tapping it with a soft ham-
mer.
ATM0024D
c. Remove O-ring from differential oil port.
SCIA3281E
27. Remove final drive assembly from transaxle case.
SAT228F
28. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transaxle case.
SCIA5378E

DISASSEMBLY
29. Remove differential side bearing adjusting shim from transaxle

case. A
AT
SCIA4938E
D
30. Remove differential side bearing outer race from converter
housing.
E
G
SCIA5379E
31. Remove RH differential side oil seal with flat-bladed screwdriver H

from converter housing.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage converter housing. I
SCIA3283E K
32. Remove differential lubricant tube from converter housing.

33. Remove plug from converter housing. (For 2WD models) L
34. Remove O-ring from plug. (For 2WD models)
SCIA5633E
35. Remove oil pump assembly according to the following proce-

dures.
a. Remove O-ring from input shaft assembly (high clutch drum).
SCIA5634E

DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove oil pump assembly and gasket from transaxle case.
SCIA3282E
c. Remove thrust washer and bearing race from oil pump assem-
bly.
SCIA3629E
36. Remove brake band according to the following procedures.

a. Loosen lock nut, then back off anchor end pin.
SCIA4869E
b. Remove brake band and strut from transaxle case.
SAT196F
● To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not

stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing
brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in the
right figure.
Leave the clip in position after removing brake band.
SAT039D

DISASSEMBLY
c. Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or burns.

A
AT
SAT040D
D
37. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch assembly) and reverse clutch assembly according to the follow-
ing procedures.
a. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch assembly) with E
reverse clutch assembly.
SCIA4009E H
b. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch assembly) from

reverse clutch drum. I
SCIA5409E
L
c. Remove needle bearing from input shaft assembly (high clutch
drum) and check for damage or wear.
SCIA4872E

DISASSEMBLY
d. Remove high clutch hub (with front sun gear) and needle bear-
ing from input shaft assembly (high clutch drum) and check for
damage or wear.
SCIA5195E
e. Remove front sun gear and needle bearing from high clutch hub
and check for damage or wear.
f. Remove bearing race from front sun gear and check for damage
or wear.
SCIA5229E
38. Remove needle bearing from transaxle case and check for dam-
age or wear.
SAT020F
39. Apply compressed air and check to see that low & reverse brake
operates.
SCIA3632E
40. Remove low one-way clutch and front planetary carrier accord-
ing to the following procedures.
a. Remove snap ring with flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA3633E

DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove low one-way clutch with a hook made of wire.

A
c. Check low one-way clutch for damage or wear.
AT
G
AAT889
d. Remove snap ring with flat-bladed screwdriver.

H
SCIA3634E
K
e. Remove front planetary carrier with low & reverse brake piston
and retainer.
L
SCIA3635E
f. Remove spring retainer.

CAUTION:
Do not remove return springs from spring retainer.
SAT148F

DISASSEMBLY
g. Make sure that low one-way clutch rotates in the direction of

clockwise arrow and locks in opposite direction.
SAT048D
h. Remove needle bearing, low & reverse brake piston and retainer
from front planetary carrier.
i. Check front planetary carrier, low & reverse brake piston,
retainer and needle bearing for damage or wear.
SCIA3636E
j. Check clearance between pinion washer and front planetary

carrier with feeler gauge.
Standard clearance: 0.20 - 0.70 mm
(0.0079 - 0.0276 in)
Allowable limit: 0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
Replace front planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allow-
able limit.
SAT025F
41. Remove rear planetary carrier and rear sun gear according to
the following procedures.
a. Remove rear planetary carrier (with rear sun gear) from tran-
saxle case.
SAT026F
b. Remove rear sun gear from rear planetary carrier.
SAT027F

DISASSEMBLY
c. Remove needle bearings from rear planetary carrier.

A
d. Check rear planetary carrier, rear sun gear and needle bearings
for damage or wear.
AT
SCIA4875E
D
e. Check clearance between pinion washer and rear planetary car-
rier with feeler gauge.
Standard clearance: 0.20 - 0.70 mm E
(0.0079 - 0.0276 in)
F
Replace rear planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allow-
able limit.
G
SAT054D
42. Remove rear internal gear and forward clutch hub from tran- H
saxle case.
SAT029F K
43. Remove overrun clutch hub from transaxle case.

L
SAT030F
44. Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub and check for
damage or wear.
SCIA5208E

DISASSEMBLY
45. Remove forward clutch assembly and overrun clutch assembly

from transaxle case.
SCIA4878E
46. Remove needle bearing from transaxle case and check for dam-
age or wear.
SCIA4877E
47. Remove output shaft assembly according to the following proce-

dures.
a. Remove side cover fitting bolts.
CAUTION:
● Do not mix bolts A and B.
● Always replace bolts A as they are self-sealing bolts.
AAT850
b. Remove side cover by lightly tapping it with a soft hammer.

CAUTION:
● Be careful not to drop output shaft assembly. It might
come out when removing side cover.
● Be careful not to damage side cover.
SAT434D
c. Remove output shaft adjusting shim.
SAT440D

DISASSEMBLY
d. Remove output shaft assembly.

A
AT
SAT035F
D
● If output shaft assembly came off with side cover, tap side
cover with a soft hammer to separate.
E
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage side cover.
G
SAT435D
e. Remove needle bearing. H
SCIA4879E
K
f. Remove bearing retainer from transaxle case.

L
ATM0315D
48. Disassemble reduction pinion gear according to the following

procedures.
a. Set manual shaft to “P” position to fix idler gear.
b. Unlock idler gear lock nut, using a pin punch.
SAT037F

DISASSEMBLY
c. Remove idler gear lock nut.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse idler gear lock nut.
SAT061D
d. Remove idler gear with puller.
SCIA5380E
e. Remove reduction pinion gear.

f. Remove reduction pinion gear adjusting shim from reduction
pinion gear.
SCIA4880E
49. Remove return spring and parking pawl spacer with flat-bladed
screwdriver from parking shaft.
50. Draw out parking shaft and remove parking pawl from transaxle
case.
51. Check parking pawl and parking shaft for damage or wear.
SCIA4881E
52. Remove parking actuator support from transaxle case.

53. Check parking actuator support for damage or wear.
SAT066D

DISASSEMBLY
54. Remove LH differential side oil seal with flat-bladed screwdriver

from transaxle case. A
CAUTION:
B
AT
SAT040F
D

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS PFP:00000
Manual Shaft ACS007VB
COMPONENTS
SCIA4882E
1. Manual shaft oil seal 2. Parking rod 3. Retaining pin

4. Parking rod plate 5. Retaining pin 6. Manual plate
7. Manual shaft 8. Retaining pin 9. Detente spring
REMOVAL
1. Remove detente spring from transaxle case.
SAT042F
2. Drive out manual plate retaining pin.
SCIA5381E

3. Drive and pull out parking rod plate retaining pin.

4. Remove parking rod plate (with parking rod) from manual shaft. A
5. Draw out parking rod (with parking rod plate) from transaxle
case.
6. Remove parking rod from parking rod plate. B
AT
SCIA5382E
D
7. Pull out manual shaft retaining pin.
8. Remove manual shaft and manual plate from transaxle case.
E
G
SAT049F
9. Remove manual shaft oil seal. H

CAUTION:
I
SAT080D
K
INSPECTION
● Check component parts for wear or damage. Replace if necessary.
L
INSTALLATION
1. Use a drift [commercial service tool φ 22 mm (0.87 in)] to drive
manual shaft oil seal into the transaxle case.
M
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse manual shaft oil seal.
● Apply ATF to outer surface of manual shaft oil seal.
2. Install parking rod to parking rod plate.
SAT081D

3. Install manual shaft and manual plate.

4. Install parking rod plate (with parking rod) on manual shaft.
SCIA3627E
5. Align groove of manual shaft and hole of transaxle case.

6. Install manual shaft retaining pin up to bottom of hole.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse retaining pin.
SCIA5383E
7. Set parking rod plate onto manual shaft and drive retaining pin.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse retaining pin.
● Both ends of pin should protrude.
SCIA5635E
8. Install manual plate retaining pin.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse retaining pin.
● Both ends of pin should protrude.
SCIA5636E
9. Install detente spring on transaxle case. Tighten detente spring

fitting bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-296, "COMPO-
NENTS" .
SAT042F

Oil Pump ACS007VC
COMPONENTS A
AT
SCIA3341E G
1. Oil pump housing oil seal 2. Oil pump housing 3. O-ring
4. Outer gear 5. Inner gear 6. Oil pump cover
7. Seal ring H
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove seal rings.
I
SCIA3638E
L
2. Loosen bolts in a crisscross pattern and remove oil pump cover.
SAT051F

3. Remove inner gear and outer gear from oil pump housing.
SAT092D
4. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.
SCIA2841E
5. Remove oil pump housing oil seal with flat-bladed screwdriver.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.
SCIA2840E

INSPECTION
Oil Pump Housing, Oil Pump Cover, Inner Gear and Outer Gear A
● Check for wear or damage.
Side Clearances B
● Measure side clearance of inner gear and outer gear in at least
four places around each outside edge. Maximum measured val-
ues should be within specified positions.
AT
(0.0012 - 0.0020 in)
● If clearance is less than standard, select inner gear and outer D
gear as a set so that clearance is within specifications. Refer to
AT-390, "Planetary Carrier and Oil Pump" .
● If clearance is more than standard, replace whole oil pump E
assembly except oil pump cover.
SCIA4957E
I
● Measure clearance between outer gear and oil pump housing.
Standard clearance: 0.111 - 0.181 mm J
(0.0044 - 0.0071 in)
● If not within allowable limit, replace whole oil pump assembly K
except oil pump cover.
SAT096D
M
Seal Ring Clearance
● Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
Standard clearance: 0.1 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
● If not within allowable limit, replace oil pump cover assembly.
SAT097D

ASSEMBLY
1. Install oil pump housing oil seal on oil pump housing.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pump housing oil seal.
● Apply ATF to outer surface of oil pump housing oil seal.
SCIA5386E
2. Install O-ring on oil pump housing.

CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
SCIA2841E
3. Install inner gear and outer gear on oil pump housing.

CAUTION:
Be careful of direction of inner gear.
SAT092D
4. Install oil pump cover on oil pump housing.

a. Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assembly
to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly on oil pump
housing assembly, then remove masking tape.
b. Tighten bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten oil pump cover
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-299, "COMPONENTS"
.
SAT051F

5. Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring groove with
petroleum jelly. A
CAUTION:
● Do not spread gap of seal rings excessively while install-
ing. The seal rings may be deformed. B
● Do not reuse seal rings.
● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.

AT
SCIA3638E

Control Valve Assembly ACS007VD
COMPONENTS
SCIA4973E
1. Oil strainer 2. O-ring 3. Snap ring

4. Terminal body 5. O-ring 6. Solenoid valve assembly
7. Control valve lower body 8. Oil cooler relief valve spring 9. Check ball
10. Separating plate 11. Support plate 12. Steel ball
13. Control valve inter body 14. Pilot filter 15. Separating plate
16. Steel ball 17. Control valve upper body

DISASSEMBLY
Disassemble control valve upper, inter and lower bodies. A

Bolt symbol a b c d e f g B
Bolt length “ ” mm (in) 13.5 58.0 40.0 66.0 33.0 78.0 18.0
(0.531) (2.283) (1.575) (2.598) (1.299) (3.071) (0.709)
AT
Number of bolts 6 3 6 11 2 2 1
f: Reamer bolt and nut.
I
SCIA4974E
1. Remove bolts a , d , reamer bolt f and nut, and then remove oil
strainer from control valve assembly. J
SCIA3484E
M
2. Remove bolts a, c, g , solenoid valve assembly and line pres-
sure solenoid valve from control valve assembly.
SCIA4438E

3. Remove O-rings from solenoid valves and terminal body.
SCIA4883E
4. Place control valve upper body facedown, and remove bolts b ,

and nut f .
CAUTION:
Remove bolts with control valve upper body facing down,
because control valve upper body and control valve inter
body may come off and steel ball may fall and be lost.
SCIA4437E
5. Remove control valve lower body from control valve inter body.
SCIA4975E
6. Turn over control valve lower body.

7. Remove bolts e , separating plate and support plates from con-
trol valve lower body.
SCIA5637E
8. Remove check balls and oil cooler relief valve springs from con-
trol valve lower body.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose check balls and oil cooler relief valve
springs.
SCIA4885E

9. Remove control valve inter body from control valve upper body.
A
AT
SCIA4977E
D
10. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in control
valve inter body and then remove them.
CAUTION: E
Be careful not to lose steel balls.
11. Remove pilot filter from control valve upper body.
12. Remove separating plate from control valve upper body. F
G
SCIA3642E
13. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in control H
valve upper body and then remove them.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose steel balls. I
SCIA3643E K
INSPECTION
Control Valve Lower Body and Upper Body
L
CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose these parts.
● Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in con-
trol valve lower body. M
SCIA4978E

● Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in con-

trol valve upper body.
SCIA4979E
Oil Strainer
● Check wire netting of oil strainer for damage.
SCIA3291E
Shift Solenoid Valves “A” and “B”, Line Pressure Solenoid Valve, Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid Valve and Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve
● Measure resistance.
– For shift solenoid valve A, refer to AT-166, "Component Inspec-
tion" .
– For shift solenoid valve B, refer to AT-171, "Component Inspec-
tion" .
– For line pressure solenoid valve, refer to AT-161, "Component
Inspection" .
– For torque converter clutch solenoid valve, refer to AT-146,
"Component Inspection" .
– For overrun clutch solenoid valve, refer to AT-181, "Component SCIA3485E
Inspection" .
– For A/T fluid temperature sensor, refer to AT-108, "Component Inspection" .
Oil Cooler Relief Valve Springs
● Check springs for damage or deformation.
● Measure free length and outer diameter. Refer to AT-386, "Con-
trol Valves" .
SAT138D

ASSEMBLY
1. Install control valve upper, inter and lower body. A
a. Place oil circuit of control valve upper body face up. Install steel
balls in their proper positions.
B
AT
SCIA3643E
D
b. Install reamer bolts f from bottom of control valve upper body.

Using reamer bolts as guides, install separating plate as a set. E
CAUTION:
Do not reuse separating plate.
F
SCIA4980E
H
c. Install pilot filter.
K
SAT074F
d. Place control valve inter body as shown in the figure (side of

control valve lower body face up). Install steel balls in their L
proper positions.
SCIA3642E

e. Install control valve inter body on control valve upper body using
reamer bolts f as guides.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls.
SCIA4981E
f. Install check balls and oil cooler relief valve springs in their
proper positions in control valve lower body.
SCIA4885E
g. Install bolts e from bottom of control valve lower body. Using

bolts e as guides, install separating plate as a set.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse separating plate.
h. Install support plates on control valve lower body.
SCIA4982E
i. Install control valve lower body on control valve inter body using
reamer bolts f as guides and tighten reamer bolts f slightly.
SCIA5669E
2. Install O-rings on solenoid valves and terminal body.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O-rings.
● Apply ATF to O-rings.
SCIA4883E

3. Install and tighten bolts.

A
Bolt symbol a b c d e f g
Bolt length “ ” mm (in) 13.5 58.0 40.0 66.0 33.0 78.0 18.0 B
(0.531) (2.283) (1.575) (2.598) (1.299) (3.071) (0.709)
Number of bolts 6 3 6 11 2 2 1
AT
Tightening torque 4.0
7.8 (0.80, 69) 7.8 (0.80, 69)
N·m (kg-m, in-lb) (0.41, 35)
f: Reamer bolt and nut.
D
SCIA4974E
J
a. Install and tighten bolts b and nut f to specified torque.
: 7.8 N·m (0.80 kg-m, 69 in-lb)
K
SCIA4437E
b. Install solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid valve

on control valve assembly.
c. Tighten bolts a , c and g to specified torque.
: 7.8 N·m (0.80 kg-m, 69 in-lb)
SCIA4438E

d. Set oil strainer, then tighten bolts a , d and nut f to specified

torque.
: 7.8 N·m (0.80 kg-m, 69 in-lb)
SCIA3484E
e. Tighten bolts e to specified torque.

: 4.0 N·m (0.41 kg-m, 35 in-lb)
SCIA3487E

Control Valve Upper Body ACS007VE
COMPONENTS A
AT
SCIA2960J

1. Retainer plate 2. Plug 3. Cooler check valve spring

4. Cooler check valve 5. Control valve upper body 6. Pilot valve
7. Pilot valve spring 8. Retainer plate 9. 1-2 accumulator retainer plate
10. 1-2 accumulator piston spring 11. 1-2 accumulator piston 12. Plug
13. Retainer plate 14. Retainer plate 15. Plug
16. 1st reducing valve 17. 1st reducing valve spring 18. Retainer plate
19. 3-2 timing valve spring 20. 3-2 timing valve 21. Retainer plate
22. Plug 23. Overrun clutch reducing valve 24. Overrun clutch reducing valve spring
25. Retainer plate 26. Torque converter relief valve spring 27. Torque converter relief valve
28. Retainer plate 29. Sleeve 30. Plug
31. Torque converter clutch control valve 32. Torque converter clutch control 33. Retainer plate
spring valve
34. Plug 35. 1-2 accumulator valve spring 36. 1-2 accumulator valve
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove valves at retainer plates.
CAUTION:
Do not use a magnetic pick-up tool.
SCIA4979E
a. Use a screwdriver to remove retainer plates.
SAT553G
b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring, plugs or sleeves.

CAUTION:
Remove plugs slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping
out.
SAT554G

c. Place mating surface of valve body face down, and remove

internal parts. A
CAUTION:
● If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body face down
and lightly tap it with a soft hammer. B
● Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves.
AT
SAT137D
D
INSPECTION
Valve Springs
● Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve springs. E
Also check for damage or deformation. Refer to AT-386, "Con-
trol Valves" .
● Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. F
H
SAT138D
Control Valves
● Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs. I
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to all components before installation. J
● Lay control valve body down when installing valves. Do not
stand control valve body upright.
K
SAT139D
M
● Lubricate control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install con-
trol valves by sliding them carefully into their bores.
CAUTION:
● Install each control valve one by one.
● Install control valves after checking, because some of

them are similar.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body.
SAT140DA

– Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert

valves into their proper positions.
SAT141D
1-2 Accumulator Valve

● Install 1-2 accumulator valve. Align 1-2 accumulator retainer
plate from opposite side of control valve body.
● Install 1-2 accumulator piston spring, 1-2 accumulator valve
spring, 1-2 accumulator piston and plugs.
SCIA5638E
● Install retainer plates.

– While pushing plugs (with 1-2 accumulator piston spring and 1-2
accumulator valve spring), install retainer plate.
SAT143D
Retainer Plates (Control Valve Upper Body)

● Install proper retainer plates. Refer to AT-313, "COMPONENTS"
.
Unit: mm (in)
Loca
Name of control valve Width A Length B
tion
L14 Pilot valve
L16 1st reducing valve
21.5 (0.846)
L17 3-2 timing valve
L19 Torque converter relief valve
SAT086F
1-2 accumulator valve 6.0 (0.236)
L15 40.5 (1.594)
1-2 accumulator piston
L18 Overrun clutch reducing valve
24.0 (0.945)
L21 Cooler check valve
L20 Torque converter clutch control valve 28.0 (1.102)

Control Valve Lower Body ACS007VF
COMPONENTS A
AT
SCIA2959J

1. Retainer plate 2. Pressure modifier piston spring 3. Pressure modifier piston

4. Parallel pin 5. Sleeve 6. Pressure modifier valve spring
7. Pressure modifier valve 8. Control valve lower body 9. Manual valve
10. Pressure regulator valve 11. Pressure regulator valve spring 12. Spring seat
13. Plug 14. Retainer plate 15. Sleeve
16. Overrun clutch control valve spring 17. Overrun clutch control valve 18. Plug
19. Retainer plate 20. Accumulator control valve spring 21. Accumulator control valve
22. Plug 23. Retainer plate 24. Retainer plate
25. Shift valve A spring 26. Shift valve A 27. Retainer plate
28. Plug 29. Shuttle plug 30. Shuttle valve spring
31. Shuttle valve 32. Shift valve B spring 33. Shift valve B
34. Plug 35. Retainer plate
DISASSEMBLY
● Remove valves at retainer plates.
For removal procedures, refer to AT-317, "COMPONENTS" .
SCIA4978E
INSPECTION
Valve Springs
● Check each valve springs for damage or deformation. Also mea-
sure free length and outer diameter. Refer to AT-386, "Control
Valves" .
● Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
SAT138D
Control Valves
● Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to all components before installation.
● Lay control valve body down when installing valves. Do not
stand control valve body upright.
SAT139D

● Install control valves.

For installation procedures, refer to AT-317, "COMPONENTS" . A
AT
SCIA4978E
D
Retainer Plates (Control Valve Lower Body)
● Install proper retainer plates. Refer to AT-317, "COMPONENTS" .
Unit: mm (in)
E
Loca Name of control valve and plug Width A Length B Type
tion
L3 Pressure regulator valve
F
L5 Accumulator control valve
L6 Shift valve A 6.0 28.0
I G
L4 Overrun clutch control valve (0.236) (1.102)
L13 Pressure modifier valve

SAT089F
L7 Shuttle valve H
17.0 24.0
L12 Shift valve B II
(0.669) (0.945)
I

Reverse Clutch ACS007VG
COMPONENTS
SCIA5086E
1. Reverse clutch drum 2. D-ring 3. Seal ring

4. Reverse clutch piston 5. Return spring 6. Spring retainer
7. Snap ring 8. Dish plate 9. Driven plate
10. Retaining plate 11. Snap ring 12. Drive plate
DISASSEMBLY
1. Check operation of reverse clutch.
a. Install seal ring onto drum support of oil pump cover and install
reverse clutch assembly. Apply compressed air to oil hole.
b. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
c. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring:
● D-ring might be damaged.
● Seal ring might be damaged.
● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
SAT092F
2. Remove snap ring with flat-bladed screwdriver.

3. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, and dish
plates.
SCIA5639E

4. Set SST on spring retainer and remove snap ring from reverse
clutch drum while compressing return spring. A
CAUTION:
● Set SST directly over return spring.
● Do not expand snap ring excessively. B

5. Remove spring retainer and return spring.
AT
SCIA5509E
D
6. Remove reverse clutch piston from reverse clutch drum by turn-
ing it.
7. Remove D-ring and seal ring from reverse clutch piston. E
G
SCIA3319E
INSPECTION
H
Reverse Clutch Snap Rings, Spring Retainer and Return Spring
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
If necessary, replace.
I
Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
● Measure thickness of facing. J
Thickness of drive plate
Standard: 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
K
Wear limit: 1.4 mm (0.055 in)
● If not within wear limit, replace.
L
SAT162D
Reverse Clutch Dish Plates M

● Check for deformation or damage.
● Measure thickness of dish plate.
Thickness of dish plate: 3.08 mm (0.1213 in)
● If deformed or fatigued, replace.
SAT163D
Reverse Clutch Piston

● Make sure that check balls are not fixed.
● Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
● Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make sure that air leaks past ball.

ASSEMBLY
1. Install D-ring and seal ring on reverse clutch piston.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse D-ring and seal ring.
● Apply ATF to D-ring and seal ring.
● Be careful with the direction of seal ring.
SCIA3735E
2. Install reverse clutch piston by turning it slowly.

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to inner surface of reverse clutch drum.
SCIA3319E
3. Install return spring and spring retainer on reverse clutch piston.

4. Set SST on spring retainer and install snap ring while compress-
ing return spring.
CAUTION:
● Set SST directly over return spring.
● Do not expand snap ring excessively.
SCIA5509E

5. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plates.
Refer to AT-387, "REVERSE CLUTCH" . A
CAUTION:
Be careful with the order and the direction of plates.
B
AT
G
SCIA4888E
NOTE: H
Install two dish plates fitting each installation direction with
reverse clutch drum groove displaced slightly.
K
SAT170D
6. Install snap ring.

L
SCIA5639E

7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not

within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Refer to AT-
387, "REVERSE CLUTCH" .
Specified clearance
Standard: 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in)
SAT105F
8. Check operation of reverse clutch. Refer to AT-320, "DISAS-

SEMBLY" .
SAT092F

High Clutch ACS007VH
COMPONENTS A
AT
SCIA2951E G
1. Seal ring 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate
4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Snap ring
7. Spring retainer 8. D-ring 9. D-ring H
10. Return spring 11. High clutch piston 12. Input shaft assembly (high clutch drum)
DISASSEMBLY
I
1. Check operation of high clutch.
a. Apply compressed air to oil hole of input shaft assembly (high
clutch drum) with nylon cloth.
J
CAUTION:
Stop up hole on opposite side of input shaft assembly (high
clutch drum) with nylon cloth.
b. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. K
L
SAT176D
2. Remove seal rings from input shaft assembly (high clutch drum).
CAUTION: M
Always replace seal rings when removed.
SCIA4890E


4. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate.
SCIA4891E
5. Set SST on spring retainer and remove snap ring from input
shaft assembly (high clutch drum) while compressing return
springs.
CAUTION:
● Set SST directly over springs.
6. Remove spring retainer and return springs.
SCIA5510E
7. Remove high clutch piston from input shaft assembly (high

clutch drum) by turning it.
SAT111F
8. Remove D-rings from high clutch piston.
SCIA4441E
INSPECTION
High Clutch Snap Rings, Spring Retainer and Return Springs
● When replacing spring retainer and return springs, replace them as a set.

High Clutch Drive Plates

● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. A
● Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate B
AT
SAT162D
D
High Clutch Piston

● Make sure that check balls are not fixed. E
● Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
● Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make sure that air leaks past ball.
Seal Ring Clearance F
● Install new seal rings onto input shaft assembly (high clutch
drum).
● Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove. G

(0.0031 - 0.0091 in) H
● If not within allowable limit, replace input shaft assembly (high
clutch drum). I
SCIA4901E
ASSEMBLY J
1. Install D-rings on high clutch piston.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to D-rings. K
● Do not reuse D-rings.
M
SCIA4441E
2. Install high clutch piston by turning it slowly.

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to inner surface of input shaft assembly (high
clutch drum).
SAT111F

3. Install return springs and spring retainer on high clutch piston.
SAT109F
4. Set SST on spring retainer and install snap ring while slowly
compressing return springs.
CAUTION:
● Set SST directly over return springs.
SCIA5510E
CAUTION:
Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper.
SAT113F
5. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate. Refer to

AT-387, "HIGH CLUTCH" .
CAUTION:
SCIA3034E

6. Install snap ring with flat-bladed screwdriver.

A
AT
SCIA4891E
D
7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Refer to AT-
387, "HIGH CLUTCH" .
E
Specified clearance
Standard: 1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 - 0.087 in)
Allowable limit: 2.8 mm (0.110 in) F
G
SCIA4892E
8. Check operation of high clutch. Refer to AT-325, "DISASSEM-

BLY" . H
SAT196D
K
9. Install seal rings to input shaft assembly (high clutch drum).
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings. L
SCIA4890E

CAUTION:
Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from
spreading.
SAT198D

Forward and Overrun Clutches ACS007VI
COMPONENTS A
AT
SCIA5154E
1. Driven plate 2. Snap ring 3. Dish plate K

4. Retaining plate 5. Driven plate 6. Retaining plate
7. Retaining plate 8. Snap ring 9. Drive plate
10. Forward clutch 11. Retaining plate 12. Drive plate L
13. Overrun clutch 14. Dish plate 15. Spring retainer
16. Snap ring 17. Return spring 18. Overrun clutch piston
19. D-ring 20. Seal ring 21. Forward clutch piston M
22. D-ring 23. Seal ring 24. Forward clutch drum
DISASSEMBLY
1. Check operation of forward clutch and overrun clutch.
a. Install bearing retainer of output shaft on forward clutch drum.
b. Apply compressed air to oil hole of forward clutch drum.
c. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
d. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring:
● Seal ring might be damaged.
SAT123F

2. Remove snap ring for forward clutch with flat-bladed screw-

driver.
3. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plates and dish
plate for forward clutch.
SCIA4894E
4. Remove snap ring for overrun clutch with flat-bladed screw-

driver.
5. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish
plate for overrun clutch.
SCIA4895E
6. Set SST on spring retainer and remove snap ring from forward
clutch drum while compressing return springs.
CAUTION:
● Set SST directly over return springs.
7. Remove spring retainer and return springs.

CAUTION:
Do not remove return springs from spring retainer.
SCIA5511E
8. Remove forward clutch piston with overrun clutch piston from

forward clutch drum by turning it.
SAT125F
9. Remove overrun clutch piston from forward clutch piston by

turning it.
SCIA5640E

10. Remove D-rings and seal rings from forward clutch piston and
overrun clutch piston. A
AT
SCIA3046E
D
INSPECTION
Snap Rings, Spring Retainer and Return Springs
● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. E
● Replace if necessary.
F
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Drive Plates
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
● Measure thickness of facing. G
Forward clutch
H
Overrun clutch I
SAT162D
J
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Dish Plates
● Check for deformation or damage. K
● Measure thickness of dish plate.
Thickness of dish plate
L
Forward clutch: 2.7 mm (0.106 in)
Overrun clutch: 2.7 mm (0.106 in)
● If deformed or fatigued, replace. M
SAT163D
Forward Clutch Drum

● Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole from outside of for-
ward clutch drum. Make sure air leaks past ball.
● Apply compressed air to oil hole from inside of forward clutch
drum. Make sure there is no air leakage.
SAT213D

Overrun Clutch Piston

● Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite return
spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
● Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side. Make
sure that air leaks past ball.
SAT212D
ASSEMBLY
1. Install D-rings and seal rings on forward clutch piston and over-
run clutch piston.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse D-rings and seal rings.
● Apply ATF to D-rings and seal rings.
● Take care with direction of seal rings.
SCIA3046E
2. Install overrun clutch piston on forward clutch piston by turning it

slowly.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston.
SCIA5640E
3. Install forward clutch piston with overrun clutch piston on for-

ward clutch drum by turning it slowly.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch drum.
SAT125F

4. Install spring retainer and return springs on overrun clutch pis-

ton. A
AT
SAT131F
D
● Align the mark on spring retainer with check ball in overrun
clutch piston.
E
G
SAT133F
5. Set SST on spring retainer and install snap ring while compress- H
ing return springs.
CAUTION:
● Set SST directly over return springs. I
SCIA5511E K
CAUTION:
Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper. L
SAT134F

6. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate
for overrun clutch. Refer to AT-388, "OVERRUN CLUTCH" .
CAUTION:
SCIA5090E
7. Install snap ring for overrun clutch with flat-bladed screwdriver.
SCIA4895E
8. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring.

If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Refer to
AT-388, "OVERRUN CLUTCH" .
Specified clearance
Standard: 0.7 - 1.1 mm (0.028 - 0.043 in)
SCIA4899E

9. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plates and dish plate
for forward clutch. Refer to AT-388, "FORWARD CLUTCH" . A
CAUTION:
B
AT
G
SCIA5641E
10. Install snap ring for forward clutch with flat-bladed screwdriver.
H
SCIA4894E
K
11. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring.
If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Refer to
AT-388, "FORWARD CLUTCH" . L
Specified clearance
Standard: 0.45 - 0.85 mm (0.0177 - 0.0335 in)
M
SAT228D
12. Check operation of forward clutch and overrun clutch. Refer to

AT-331, "DISASSEMBLY" .
SAT123F

Low & Reverse Brake ACS007VJ
COMPONENTS
SCIA3893E
1. Driven plate 2. Dish plate 3. Snap ring

7. Low & reverse brake piston 8. Retainer 9. Snap ring
10. Retaining plate 11. Drive plate 12. Retaining plate
DISASSEMBLY
1. Check operation of low & reverse brake.
a. Apply compressed air to oil hole of transaxle case.
b. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.

3. Remove low & reverse brake piston (with retainer) and spring
retainer from transaxle case.
SCIA4903E

5. Remove driven plates, drive plates, retaining plates and dish
plates from transaxle case.
SCIA4904E

6. In order to remove low & reverse brake piston, apply com-

pressed air to oil hole of retainer while holding low & reverse A
brake piston.
CAUTION:
Apply air gradually and allow low & reverse brake piston to B
come out evenly.
AT
SCIA3651E
D
7. Remove D-rings from low & reverse brake piston.
G
SCIA4381E
INSPECTION
H
Low & Reverse Brake Snap Rings, Spring Retainer and Return Springs
I
Low & Reverse Brake Drive Plate
● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. J
● Measure thickness of facing.
K
● If not within wear limit, replace. L
SAT162D M
ASSEMBLY
1. Install D-rings on low & reverse brake piston.
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to D-rings.
SCIA4381E

2. Set and align low & reverse brake piston with retainer.
CAUTION:
● This operation is required in order to engage the protru-
sions of piston to return springs correctly.
Further procedures are given in AT-362, "ASSEMBLY" .
● Apply ATF to surface of low & reverse brake piston and
retainer.
SCIA3652E
3. Install driven plates, drive plates, retaining plates and dish plates
on transaxle case. Refer to AT-389, "LOW & REVERSE
BRAKE" .
CAUTION:
Be careful with the order of plates and the direction of dish
plates.
SCIA5092E
SCIA4904E
5. Measure clearance between retaining plate and transaxle case.

If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. (front
side) Refer to AT-389, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" .
Specified clearance
Standard: 1.7 - 2.1 mm (0.067 - 0.083 in)
SCIA3654E

6. Install low & reverse brake piston (with retainer) and spring
retainer on transaxle case. A
8. Check operation of low & reverse brake. Refer to AT-338, "DIS-
ASSEMBLY" . B
AT
SCIA4903E

Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub ACS007VK
COMPONENTS
SCIA4051E
1. Overrun clutch hub 2. Thrust washer 3. Bearing race

4. Forward one-way clutch 5. Forward clutch hub 6. Thrust washer
7. Rear internal gear
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove overrun clutch hub and thrust washer from forward
clutch hub.
SCIA3692E
2. Remove forward clutch hub from rear internal gear.
SAT251D

3. Remove bearing race from rear internal gear.

A
AT
SCIA3655E
D
4. Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear.
G
SCIA3691E
5. Remove bearing race from forward one-way clutch. H
SCIA4905E
K
6. Remove forward one-way clutch from forward clutch hub.
SAT255D

INSPECTION
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub
● Check rubbing surfaces for wear or damage.
SAT256D
Bearing Races and Forward One-Way Clutch

● Check bearing races for deformation and damage.
● Check forward one-way clutch for wear and damage.
SCIA3657E
ASSEMBLY
1. Install forward one-way clutch on forward clutch hub.
CAUTION:
Be careful with the direction of forward one-way clutch.
SAT976H
2. Install bearing race on forward one-way clutch.

CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
SCIA4906E

3. Install thrust washer on rear internal gear.

CAUTION: A
● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
● Align pawls of thrust washer with holes of rear internal

gear. B
AT
SCIA3690E
D
4. Install bearing race on rear internal gear.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. E
G
SCIA3659E
5. Install forward clutch hub on rear internal gear. H

CAUTION:
● Check operation of forward one-way clutch.
Hold rear internal gear and turn forward clutch hub.
Check forward clutch hub for correct locking and unlock- I
ing directions.
● If not as shown in figure, check installation direction of
forward one-way clutch. J
AAT426
K
6. Install thrust washer and overrun clutch hub on forward clutch
hub.
CAUTION: L
● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
● Align pawls of thrust washer with holes of overrun clutch

hub. M
● Align projections of rear internal gear with holes of over-
run clutch hub.
SCIA3692E

Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear and Bearing Retainer ACS007VL
COMPONENTS
SCIA4907E
1. Idler gear lock nut 2. Idler gear 3. Reduction pinion gear adjusting shim
4. Idler gear bearing 5. Reduction pinion gear bearing outer race 6. Reduction pinion gear bearing inner race
7. Reduction pinion gear 8. Snap ring 9. Radial needle bearing
10. Seal ring 11. Bearing retainer 12. Needle bearing
13. Seal ring 14. Output shaft 15. Output shaft bearing
16. Output shaft adjusting shim
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove seal rings from output shaft and bearing retainer.
SCIA3660E

2. Remove output shaft bearing with flat-bladed screwdrivers.

CAUTION: A
● Always replace bearing with a new one when removed.
● Do not damage output shaft.

B
AT
SAT165F
D
3. Remove snap ring from bearing retainer.
G
SAT166F
4. Remove radial needle bearing from bearing retainer. H
SCIA4958E
K
5. Remove idler gear bearing inner race from idler gear.
SCIA4959E
6. Remove idler gear bearing outer race from transaxle case.
SCIA5390E

7. Press out reduction pinion gear bearing inner race from reduc-
tion pinion gear.
SAT169F
8. Remove reduction pinion gear bearing outer race from transaxle

case.
SAT319K
INSPECTION
Output Shaft, Idler Gear and Reduction Pinion Gear
● Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending.
● Check gears for wear, chips and cracks.
Bearings
● Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks,
pitting or wear.
● When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and inner
race as a set.
SPD715
Seal Ring Clearance

● Install new seal rings to output shaft.
● Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of output
shaft.
● If not within allowable limit, replace output shaft.
● Install new seal rings to bearing retainer.
● Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of bear-
ing retainer. SAT171F

● If not within allowable limit, replace bearing retainer.

ASSEMBLY
1. Press reduction pinion gear bearing inner race on reduction pin- A
ion gear.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to reduction pinion gear bearing inner race. B
AT
SCIA5391E
D
2. Install reduction pinion gear bearing outer race on transaxle

case. Refer to AT-346, "COMPONENTS" . E
3. Checking reduction pinion gear bearing preload. Refer to AT-
364, "REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING PRELOAD" .
F
SAT319K
H
4. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse idler gear bearing.
I
● Apply ATF to idler gear bearing.
K
SCIA5392E
5. Install idler gear bearing outer race on transaxle case.

L
CAUTION:

M
SCIA5516E

6. Press output shaft bearing on output shaft.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse output shaft bearing.
● Apply ATF to output shaft bearing.
SAT863D
7. Press radial needle bearing on bearing retainer.
SCIA4961E
8. Install snap ring to bearing retainer.
SAT166F
9. After packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly, carefully install

new seal rings on output shaft and bearing retainer.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse seal rings.
SCIA3660E

CAUTION:
Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from A
spreading.
AT
SAT179F D

Band Servo Piston Assembly ACS007VM
COMPONENTS
SCIA4908E
1. Lock nut 2. Anchor end pin 3. Brake band

4. Strut 5. O-ring 6. Servo piston retainer
7. D-ring 8. O/D servo piston 9. O-ring
10. O/D servo piston retainer 11. O/D servo piston retainer fitting bolt 12. E-ring
13. Spring retainer 14. O/D servo return spring 15. D-ring
16. Band servo piston 17. Band servo thrust washer 18. Band servo piston stem
19. 2nd servo return spring
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove O/D servo piston retainer fitting bolts.
AAT879
2. Apply compressed air to oil hole in transaxle case to remove O/

D servo piston retainer and band servo piston assembly.
CAUTION:
Hold band servo piston assembly with a rag or nylon waste.
3. Remove 2nd servo return spring from transaxle case.
SCIA4447E

4. Apply compressed air to oil hole in O/D servo piston retainer to

remove O/D servo piston from O/D servo piston retainer. A
CAUTION:
Hold O/D servo piston while applying compressed air.
B
AT
SCIA5645E
D
5. Remove D-ring from O/D servo piston.
G
SCIA3689E
6. Remove O-rings from O/D servo piston retainer. H
SCIA5646E
K
7. Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston retainer
by pushing it forward.
L
SAT293D
8. Place band servo piston stem end on a wooden block. While

pushing spring retainer down, remove E-ring.
SAT294D

9. Remove spring retainer, O/D servo return spring, band servo

thrust washer and band servo piston stem from band servo pis-
ton.
SCIA4746E
10. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer.
SCIA3671E
11. Remove D-rings from band servo piston.
SCIA3688E
INSPECTION
Pistons, Retainers and Piston Stem
● Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage.
Return Springs
● Check for deformation or damage.
● Measure free length and outer diameter. Refer to AT-391, "Band
Servo" .
AAT884

ASSEMBLY
1. Install D-rings to band servo piston. A
CAUTION:
● Apply ATF to D-rings. B

● Pay attention to position of each D-rings.
AT
SCIA3688E
D
2. Install band servo piston stem, band servo thrust washer, O/D
servo return spring and spring retainer to band servo piston. E
SCIA4746E
H
3. Place band servo piston stem end on a wooden block. While
pushing spring retainer down, install E-ring.
CAUTION:
I
Do not reuse E-ring.
K
SCIA4336E
4. Install O-rings to servo piston retainer.

L
CAUTION:

M
● Pay attention to position of each O-rings.
SCIA3671E

5. Install band servo piston assembly to servo piston retainer by

pushing it inward.
SAT303D
6. Install D-ring to O/D servo piston.

CAUTION:
● Do not reuse D-ring.
● Apply ATF to D-ring.
SCIA3689E
7. Install O/D servo piston to O/D servo piston retainer fitting the
installation direction on it.
AAT886
8. Install band servo piston assembly and 2nd servo return spring
to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to O-rings of band servo piston assembly and
transaxle case.
SCIA3672E
9. Install O-rings to O/D servo piston retainer.

CAUTION:
● Pay attention to position of each O-rings.
SCIA5646E

10. Install O/D servo piston retainer to transaxle case. Refer to AT-
352, "COMPONENTS" . A
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse O/D servo piston retainer fitting bolts.
● Apply ATF to O-rings of O/D servo piston retainer and B

transaxle case.
AT
AAT879
D

Final Drive ACS007VN
COMPONENTS
SCIA4912E
1. Pinion mate gear 2. Pinion mate gear thrust washer 3. Pinion mate shaft
4. Lock pin 5. Side gear 6. Side gear thrust washer
7. Differential side bearing 8. Differential case 9. Final gear
10. Differential side bearing 11. Differential side bearing adjusting shim
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove final gear.
SMT505B
2. Press out differential side bearings.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to mix up the right and left bearings.
SCIA5394E

3. Remove differential side bearing outer race and differential side

bearing adjusting shim from transaxle case. A
AT
SCIA5378E
D
4. Drive out lock pin.
G
SCIA5395E
5. Draw out pinion mate shaft. H

6. Remove pinion mate gears, pinion mate gear thrust washers,
side gears and side gear thrust washers.
I
SAT316D
K
INSPECTION
Gears, Washers, Pinion Mate Shaft and Differential Case
● Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears, pinion L
mate gears and pinion mate shaft.
● Check washers for wear.
M
SAT544F

Bearings
● Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks,
pitting or wear.
● When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and inner
race as a set.
SPD715
ASSEMBLY
1. Attach side gear thrust washers to side gears, then install pinion
mate thrust washers and pinion mate gears in place.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to any parts.
SMT839
2. Insert pinion mate shaft.

CAUTION:
When inserting, be careful not to damage pinion mate gear
thrust washers.
SMT087A
3. Measure clearance between side gear and differential case with

washers following the procedure below:
a. Set SST and dial indicator on side gear.
SCIA5580E

b. Move side gear up and down to measure dial indicator deflec-

tion. Always measure indicator deflection on both side gears. A
Clearance between side 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in)
gear and differential
case with washer: B
c. If not within specification, adjust clearance by changing thick-

ness of differential side gear thrust washers. Refer to AT-389,
"Final Drive" . AT
SMT611A
D
4. Install lock pin.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse lock pin. E
● Make sure that lock pin is flush with case.
G
SCIA5395E
5. Press on differential side bearings. H

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to differential side bearings.
6. Install differential side bearing outer race and differential side I
bearing adjusting shim on transaxle case. Refer to AT-363,
"Adjustment (1)" .
SCIA5397E
K
7. Tighten final gear and tighten fixing bolts to the specified torque
in numerical order shown in the figure after temporarily tighten-
ing them. Refer to AT-358, "COMPONENTS" . L
ATM0432D

ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY PFP:00000
Assembly (1) ACS007VO
1. Install differential side oil seals on transaxle case and converter housing with tool.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse differential side oil seals.
● Apply ATF to differential side oil seals.
Drift to be used:
Location 2WD models AWD models
Transaxle case side (Left)
ST33400001 ST33400001
Tool number
(J-26082) (J-26082)
(Kent-Moore No.)
Converter housing side (Right)
ST33400001 KV40100621
Tool number
(J-26082) (J-25273)
(Kent-Moore No.)
SCIA5165E
● Drive the differential side oil seals into the case until it
become flush using the drift below. Refer to dimensions A and
B.
Unit: mm (in)
Dimensions A, B 0± 0.5 (0±0.020)
NOTE:
The differential side oil seal pulling direction is used as the
reference.
SCIA5614E
SCIA5615E
2. Install parking actuator support to transaxle case. Tighten park-

ing actuator support bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-
272, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Be careful with the direction of parking actuator support.
SAT183F

ASSEMBLY
3. Install parking pawl on transaxle case and fix it with parking

shaft. A
4. Install return spring and parking pawl spacer.
AT
SCIA4881E
D
Adjustment (1) ACS007VP
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD

1. Install differential side bearing outer race without differential side
E
bearing adjusting shim on transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to differential side bearing outer race.
F
2. Install differential side bearing outer race on converter housing.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to differential side bearing outer race.
G
SAT870D
H
3. Place final drive assembly on transaxle case.
4. Install converter housing on transaxle case. Tighten converter
housing mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-272, I
"Components" .
K
ATM0024D

ASSEMBLY
5. Attach dial indicator on differential case at converter housing

side.
6. Insert SST into differential side gear from transaxle case side.
7. Move SST up and down and measure dial indicator deflection.
8. Select proper thickness of differential side bearing adjusting
shim(s). Refer to AT-390, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING
PRELOAD ADJUSTING SHIMS" .
Suitable shim thickness = Dial indicator deflection + Speci-
fied bearing preload
Bearing preload: 0.05 - 0.09 mm (0.0020 - 0.0035 in)
SCIA5512E
9. Remove converter housing from transaxle case.

10. Remove final drive assembly from transaxle case.
11. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transaxle case.
12. Reinstall differential side bearing outer race and differential side
bearing adjusting shim selected from SDS table on transaxle
case. Refer to AT-390, "DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRE-
LOAD ADJUSTING SHIMS" .
13. Reinstall converter housing on transaxle case and tighten con-
verter housing mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
AT-272, "Components" . SCIA5378E
14. Insert SST and measure turning torque of final drive assembly.
● Turn final drive assembly in both directions several times
to seat bearing rollers correctly.
Turning torque of final drive assembly (New bearing):
0.78 - 1.37 N·m (8.0 - 14.0 kg-cm, 6.9 - 12.2 in-lb)
● When old bearing is used again, turning torque will be
slightly less than the above.
● Make sure torque is within the specified range.
SCIA5513E
REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING PRELOAD

1. Remove converter housing and final drive assembly from tran-
saxle case.
2. Select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear adjusting shim
using the following procedures.
a. Place reduction pinion gear on transaxle case as shown.
SCIA3623E

ASSEMBLY
b. Place idler gear bearing on transaxle case.

A
c. Measure dimensions “B” “C” and “D” and calculate dimension
“A”.
A = D − (B + C)
B
“A”: Distance between the surface of idler gear
bearing inner race and the adjusting shim
mating surface of reduction pinion gear.
AT
SCIA3624E
D
● Measure dimension “B” between the end of reduction pinion
gear and the surface of transaxle case.
● Measure dimension “B” in at least two places. E
G
SCIA3625E
● Measure dimension “C” between the surface of idler gear H

bearing inner race and the surface of transaxle case.
● Measure dimension “C” in at least two places.
I
SCIA3626E K
● Measure dimension “D” between the end of reduction pinion

gear and the adjusting shim mating surface of reduction pin- L
ion gear.
● Measure dimension “D” in at least two places.
● Calculate dimension “A”. M
A = D − (B + C)
SAT336DA
d. Measure dimension “E” between the end of idler gear and idler
gear bearing inner race mating surface of idler gear.
● Measure dimension “E” in at least two places.
e. Select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear adjusting shim.

Refer to AT-391, "REDUCTION PINION GEAR ADJUSTING
SHIMS" .
Proper shim thickness = A − E − 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)*
(*: Bearing preload)
SAT337D

ASSEMBLY
3. Install reduction pinion gear and reduction pinion gear adjusting

shim selected in step 2-e on transaxle case.
4. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear.
CAUTION:
5. Press idler gear on reduction pinion gear.

CAUTION:
Press idler gear until idler gear fully contacts adjusting
shim. SCIA5651E
6. Set manual shaft to “P” position to fix idler gear.

7. Tighten idler gear lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to AT-
272, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Lock idler gear with parking pawl when tightening lock nut.
SAT189F
8. Measure turning torque of reduction pinion gear.

● When measuring turning torque, turn reduction pinion
gear in both directions several times to seat bearing roll-
ers correctly.
Turning torque of 0.05 - 0.39 N·m (0.5 - 4.0 kg-cm,
reduction pinion gear: 0.43 - 3.47 in-lb)
● If turning torque is out of specification, decrease or
increase thickness of reduction pinion gear adjusting
shim.
SCIA5514E
9. After properly adjusting turning torque, clinch idler gear lock nut
as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse idler gear lock nut.
SCIA4915E

ASSEMBLY
OUTPUT SHAFT END PLAY

● Measure clearance between side cover and the end of the out- A
put shaft bearing.
● Select proper thickness of output shaft adjusting shim so that
clearance is within specifications. B
AT
SCIA4916E
D
1. Install bearing retainer for output shaft. Refer to AT-272, "Com-

ponents" . E
SAT191F
H
2. Install needle bearing on bearing retainer.
CAUTION:
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. I
● Be careful with the direction of needle bearing.
K
SCIA4917E
3. Install output shaft on transaxle case. L
SAT035F

ASSEMBLY
4. Measure dimensions “ 1 ” and “ 2 ” at side cover and then cal-

culate dimension “A”.
● Measure dimension “ 1 ” and “ 2 ” in at least two places.
“A”: Distance between transaxle case fitting sur-

face and adjusting shim mating surface.
A= 1 − 2
2: Height of gauge
SAT374F
5. Measure dimensions “ 2 ” and “ 3 ” and then calculate dimen-

sion “B”.
● Measure dimension “ 2 ” and “ 3 ” in at least two places.
“B”: Distance between the end of output shaft
bearing outer race and the side cover fitting
surface of transaxle case.
B= 2 − 3
2: Height of gauge
SAT375F
6. Select proper thickness of output shaft adjusting shim so that

output shaft end play (clearance between side cover and output
shaft bearing) is within specifications. Refer to AT-392, "OUT-
PUT SHAFT ADJUSTING SHIMS" .
Output shaft end play (A − B): 0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.0059 in)
7. Install output shaft adjusting shim on output shaft bearing.
SCIA4918E
Assembly (2) ACS007VQ
1. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket

or equivalent. Refer to GI-48, "Recommended Chemical Prod-
ucts and Sealants" .) to transaxle case as shown in figure.
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from the transaxle case and side cover mounting surface.
SCIA5652E
2. Fit mounting part of output shaft bearing on side cover to output

shaft bearing, and after adjusting knock pin position, install it
with light taps of a soft hammer and things like that.
CAUTION:
When installing, to avoid getting damaged and deformed,
set mounting part straight to parallel with the mounting sur-
face.
SAT442D

ASSEMBLY
3. Tighten side cover fitting bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-

272, "Components" . A
CAUTION:
● Do not mix bolts A and B.
● Always replace bolts A as they are self-sealing bolts. B
AT
AAT850
D
4. Install needle bearing on transaxle case.
CAUTION:
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. E
G
SCIA4877E
5. Install forward clutch assembly. H

CAUTION:
● Align teeth of low & reverse brake before installing.
● Make sure that bearing retainer seal rings are not spread. I
● If forward clutch assembly is correctly seated, points 1
and 2 are at almost same level.
J
SCIA4920E
6. Install needle bearing.

CAUTION:
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SCIA4921E

ASSEMBLY
7. Install overrun clutch hub.

CAUTION:
Align teeth of overrun clutch before installing.
SAT030F
8. Check operation of forward one-way clutch.

CAUTION:
● Hold rear internal gear and turn forward clutch hub.
Check forward clutch hub for correct locking and unlock-
ing directions.
● If not as shown in figure, check installation direction of
forward one-way clutch.
AAT426
9. Install forward clutch hub and rear internal gear on transaxle

case.
CAUTION:
● Align teeth of forward clutch before installing.
● Make sure that three pawls of thrust washer are correctly

aligned after installing.
SCIA4922E
10. Install rear planetary carrier and rear sun gear according to the
following procedures.
a. Install needle bearings on rear planetary carrier.
CAUTION:
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearings.
● Be careful with the direction of needle bearings.
SCIA4875E

ASSEMBLY
b. Install rear sun gear on rear planetary carrier.

A
CAUTION:
Be careful with the direction of rear sun gear.
AT
SAT027F
D
c. Install rear planetary carrier (with rear sun gear) on transaxle
case.
E
G
SAT026F
11. Install needle bearing on front planetary carrier, then install them H
together on transaxle case.
CAUTION:
I
SCIA4923E K
12. Install low & reverse brake piston according to the following pro-
cedures.
L
a. Set and align return springs to transaxle case gutters as shown
in figure.
SAT322F
b. Set and align low & reverse brake piston with retainer.
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to the surface of low & reverse brake piston and
retainer.
SCIA3652E

ASSEMBLY
c. Install low & reverse brake piston and retainer on transaxle

case.
CAUTION:
Align bracket to specified gutter as indicated in the figure.
SCIA5653E
d. Make sure that each protrusion of low & reverse brake piston is
correctly set to corresponding return spring as follows.
● Push low & reverse brake piston and retainer evenly and
confirm they move smoothly.
● If they cannot move smoothly, remove low & reverse
brake piston and retainer and align return spring cor-
rectly as instructed in step “a”.
SCIA5654E
e. Push down low & reverse brake piston and retainer and install
snap ring.
SCIA5515E
13. Install low one-way clutch to front planetary carrier by turning

carrier in the direction of arrow shown.
SAT206F

ASSEMBLY

A
CAUTION:
Forward clutch and bearing must be correctly installed for
snap ring to fit into groove of transaxle case.
B
AT
SCIA3633E
D
15. Install front sun gear according to the following procedures.
a. Install bearing race on front sun gear.
CAUTION: E
b. Install needle bearing on front sun gear.
CAUTION: F

G
SCIA4924E
I
c. Install front sun gear on front planetary carrier.
L
SCIA4458E
16. Install high clutch hub according to the following procedures. M

a. Install needle bearing on front sun gear.
CAUTION:
SCIA4925E

ASSEMBLY
b. Install high clutch hub on front sun gear.
SCIA4459E
17. Install input shaft assembly (high clutch assembly) according to the following procedures.
a. Install needle bearing on high clutch hub.
CAUTION:
SCIA4926E
b. Install input shaft assembly (high clutch assembly) on high

clutch hub.
SCIA4036E
c. Install needle bearing on input shaft assembly (high clutch

drum).
CAUTION:
SCIA4872E

ASSEMBLY
18. Install reverse clutch assembly on input shaft assembly (high

clutch drum). A
AT
SCIA4461E
D
Adjustment (2) ACS007VR
When any parts listed below are replaced, adjust total end play and reverse clutch end play.
E
Part name Total end play Reverse clutch end play
transaxle case ● ●
Overrun clutch hub ● ●
F
Rear internal gear ● ●
Rear planetary carrier ● ●
G
Rear sun gear ● ●
Front planetary carrier ● ●
Front sun gear ● ● H
High clutch hub ● ●
Input shaft assembly (high clutch drum) ● ●
I
Oil pump cover ● ●
Reverse clutch drum — ●
J
TOTAL END PLAY
● Measure clearance between reverse clutch drum and needle
bearing for oil pump cover. K
● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is within
specifications.
L
SCIA3661E
1. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension

“J”.
SCIA3662E

ASSEMBLY
a. Measure dimension “K”.
SCIA3663E
b. Measure dimension “L”.

c. Calculate dimension “J”.
“J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of
transaxle case and needle bearing mating surface of
input shaft assembly (high clutch drum).
J=K–L
SCIA3664E
2. Measure dimension “M”.

a. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
SAT378D
b. Measure dimension “M”.

“M”: Distance between transaxle case fitting surface of
oil pump cover and needle bearing on oil pump cover.
“M1 ”: Indication of gauge.
SAT379D
c. Measure thickness of straightedge “t”.

M = M1 – t
SAT443D

ASSEMBLY
3. Adjust total end play “T1 ”.

T1 = J – M A
Total end play “T1 ”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in) B
● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play is within specifications. Refer to AT-392,
"Total End Play" .
REVERSE CLUTCH END PLAY AT
● Measure clearance between oil pump cover and thrust washer
for reverse clutch drum.
● Select proper thickness of thrust washer so that end play is D
within specification.
F
SCIA3665E
1. Measure dimensions “O” and “P” and then calculate dimension G

“N”.
SCIA3666E
J
a. Place thrust washer on reverse clutch drum.

b. Measure dimension “O”. K
SCIA3667E
c. Measure dimension “P”.

d. Calculate dimension “N”.
“N”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of tran-
saxle case and thrust washer on reverse clutch drum.
N=O–P
SCIA3668E

ASSEMBLY
2. Measure dimensions “R” and “S” and then calculate dimension

“Q”.
SAT384D
a. Measure dimension “R”.
SAT385D
b. Measure dimension “S”.

c. Calculate dimension “Q”.
“Q”: Distance between transaxle case fitting surface
and thrust washer mating surface.
Q=R–S
SAT386D
3. Adjust reverse clutch end play “T2 ”.

T2 = N – Q
Reverse clutch end play:
0.61 - 1.0 mm (0.0240 - 0.039 in)
● Select proper thickness of thrust washer so that reverse clutch end play is within specifications. Refer
to AT-392, "Reverse Clutch End Play" .
Assembly (3) ACS007VS
1. Install anchor end pin and lock nut on transaxle case.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse anchor end pin.
2. Place brake band and strut on outside of reverse clutch drum.
Tighten anchor end pin just enough so that brake band is evenly
fitted on reverse clutch drum.
SAT196F

ASSEMBLY
3. Place bearing race selected in total end play adjustment step on

oil pump cover. A
CAUTION:
4. Place thrust washer selected in reverse clutch end play step on B
reverse clutch drum.
CAUTION:
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. AT
SCIA3629E
D
5. Install oil pump assembly and gasket on transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket. E
6. Tighten oil pump fitting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-
272, "Components" .
F
G
SCIA2980E
7. Install O-ring to input shaft assembly (high clutch drum). H

CAUTION:

I
SCIA4928E
K
8. Adjust brake band.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse anchor end pin. L
a. Tighten anchor end pin to the specified torque.
: 4.9 N·m (0.50 kg-m, 43 in-lb) M
b. Back off anchor end pin two and a half turns.

c. While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut. Refer to AT-389,
"BRAKE BAND" .
SCIA4869E
9. Apply compressed air to oil holes of transaxle case and check

operation of brake band.
SAT397D

ASSEMBLY
10. Install final drive assembly on transaxle case.
SAT228F
11. Install differential lubricant tube on converter housing. Tighten

differential lubricant tube bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
AT-272, "Components" .
SCIA5633E
12. Install O-ring on differential oil port of transaxle case.

CAUTION:
SCIA3281E
13. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket

or equivalent. Refer to GI-48, "Recommended Chemical Prod-
ucts and Sealants" .) to transaxle case as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from the transaxle case and converter housing mounting
surface.
SCIA5655E
14. Install converter housing on transaxle case. Tighten converter

housing mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-272,
"Components" .
15. Install O-ring on plug. (For 2WD models)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
16. Install plug on converter housing. (For 2WD models)
ATM0024D

ASSEMBLY
17. Install accumulator pistons.

A
a. Check contact surface of accumulator piston for damage.
AT
SCIA3302E
D
b. Install O-rings on accumulator pistons. Refer to AT-386, "O-
RING" .
CAUTION: E
G
SCIA3303E
c. Install accumulator pistons and return springs on transaxle case. H

Refer to AT-387, "RETURN SPRING" .
CAUTION:
Apply ATF to inner surface of transaxle case. I
SCIA3304E K
18. Install lip seals for band servo oil holes on transaxle case.
CAUTION: L
● Do not reuse lip seals.
● Apply ATF to lip seals.
SCIA4867E
19. Install low & reverse brake tube and oil sleeve. Tighten Low &
reverse brake tube bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-
272, "Components" .
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil sleeve.
● Apply ATF to oil sleeve.
SCIA4868E

ASSEMBLY
20. Install control valve assembly.

a. Install O-ring to terminal body.
CAUTION:
b. Insert manual valve into control valve assembly.

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to manual valve.
SCIA3999E
c. Set manual shaft in “N” position.

d. Install control valve assembly on transaxle case while aligning
manual valve with manual plate.
SAT094J
e. Pass terminal cord assembly through transaxle case and install

terminal body on transaxle case by pushing it.
f. Install snap ring to terminal body.
CAUTION:
SCIA4866E

ASSEMBLY
g. Tighten control valve assembly fixing bolts A , B and C to the specified torque. Refer to AT-272, "Compo-
nents" . A
Bolt symbol A B C
B
Bolt length “ ” mm (in) 40.0 mm 33.0 mm 43.5 mm
(1.575 in) (1.299 in) (1.713 in)
Number of bolts 5 6 2 AT
AAT260A H
21. Install oil pan.

a. Attach a magnets to oil pan. I
b. Install oil pan gasket on oil pan.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse oil pan gasket. J
● Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan gasket mounting surface.
c. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) on transaxle case. K
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. SCIA3476E
from oil pan gasket mounting surface. L

d. Tighten oil pan fitting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-272, "Components" .
CAUTION:
● Always replace oil pan fitting bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. M
● Tighten four bolts in a crisscross pattern to prevent dislocation of oil pan gasket.
e. Install drain plug gasket on drain plug.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse drain plug gasket.
f. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to AT-272, "Components" .
22. Install PNP switch.
a. Set manual shaft in “P” position.
b. Temporarily install PNP switch on manual shaft.
c. Move manual shaft to “N” position.
SCIA3154E

ASSEMBLY
d. Use a 3 mm (0.12 in) pin for this adjustment.

i. Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole.
ii. Rotate PNP switch until the pin can also be inserted straight into
hole in PNP switch.
e. Tighten PNP switch fitting bolts. Refer to AT-272, "Components"
.
f. Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting PNP switch.
23. Install bracket on transaxle case.
24. Install O-ring on revolution sensor.
CAUTION: SCIA4930E
25. Install revolution sensor on transaxle case.

26. Install torque converter.
a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
CAUTION:
● Approximately 1 liter (1-1/8 US qt, 7/8 Imp qt) of fluid is
required for a new torque converter.
● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of fluid as was drained.
SAT428DA
b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con-

verter with notches of oil pump.
SAT429D
c. Measure distance “A” to Make sure that torque converter is in

proper position.
Distance “A”: 14 mm (0.55 in) or more
SCIA5621E

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030

A
General Specifications ACS007VT
Engine QR25DE
Axle type 2WD AWD B
Automatic transaxle model RE4F04B
Automatic transaxle assembly Model code number 85X65 85X64
AT
1st 2.785
2nd 1.545
3rd 1.000 D
Transaxle gear ratio
4th 0.694
Reverse 2.272
E
Final drive 4.087
NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTM III/
Recommended fluid
MERCONTM, or equivalent ATF*
F
Fluid capacity (US qt, Imp qt) 8.5 (9, 7-1/2)
*: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" .

G
Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ACS007VU
Throttle posi- Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Shift pattern
tion D1 → D2 D2 → D3 D3 → D 4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1 H
57 - 65 107 - 115 167 - 175 163 - 171 97 - 105 41 - 49
Comfort
(35 - 40) (66 - 71) (104 - 109) (101 - 106) (60 - 65) (25 - 30)
Full throttle I
57 - 65 107 - 115 167 - 175 163 - 171 97 - 105 41 - 49
Auto power
(35 - 40) (66 - 71) (104 - 109) (101 - 106) (60 - 65) (25 - 30)
36 - 44 71 - 79 131 - 139 77 - 85 38 - 46 5 - 13
Comfort J
(22 - 27) (44 - 49) (81 - 86) (48 - 53) (23 - 28) (3 - 8)
Half throttle
42 - 50 79 - 87 131 - 139 77 - 85 45 - 53 5 - 13
Auto power
(26 - 31) (49 - 54) (81 - 86) (48 - 53) (28 - 33) (3 - 8)
K
Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Look-Up ACS008QK
Vehicle speed
Overdrive control switch km/h (MPH) L
Throttle position Shift pattern
(Shift position)
Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF”
Comfort 61 - 69 (38 - 43) 51 - 59 (31 - 36)
1/8 ON [D4 ] M
Power 61 - 69 (38 - 43) 51 - 59 (31 - 36)
Stall Revolution ACS007VV
Stall revolution rpm 2,300 - 2,750
Line Pressure ACS007VW

Engine speed
At idle speed 500 (5.1, 73) 778 (7.9, 113)
At stall speed 1,233 (12.6, 179) 1,918 (19.6, 278)

Control Valves ACS007VX
CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS

Unit: mm (in)
Item
Parts
Part No.* Free length Outer diameter
L14 Pilot valve spring 31742-3AX03 38.98 (1.535) 8.9 (0.350)
1-2 accumulator valve spring 31742-3AX00 20.5 (0.807) 6.95 (0.274)
L15
1-2 accumulator piston spring 31742-3AX08 55.26 (2.176) 19.6 (0.772)
L16 1st reducing valve spring 31742-80X05 27.0 (1.063) 7.0 (0.276)
Upper body L17 3-2 timing valve spring 31736-01X00 23.29 (0.917) 6.65 (0.262)
L18 Overrun clutch reducing valve spring 31742-80X15 37.5 (1.476) 6.9 (0.272)
L19 Torque converter relief valve spring 31742-80X07 31.0 (1.220) 9.0 (0.354)
L20 Torque converter clutch control valve spring 31742-85X00 57.0 (2.244) 6.5 (0.256)
L21 Cooler check valve spring 31742-85X01 29.4 (1.157) 6.0 (0.236)
L3 Pressure regulator valve spring 31742-80X13 45.0 (1.772) 15.0 (0.591)
L4 Overrun clutch control valve spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276)
L5 Accumulator control valve spring 31742-80X02 22.0 (0.866) 6.5 (0.256)
L6 Shift valve A spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276)
Lower body L7 Shuttle valve spring 31762-41X04 51.0 (2.008) 5.65 (0.222)
L12 Shift valve B spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276)
Pressure modifier piston spring 31742-41X15 30.5 (1.201) 9.8 (0.386)
L13
Pressure modifier valve spring 31742-80X16 32.0 (1.260) 6.9 (0.272)
— Oil cooler relief valve spring 31872-31X00 17.02 (0.670) 8.0 (0.315)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Accumulator ACS007VY
O-RING
Unit: mm (in)
Inner diameter Inner diameter
Accumulator Part No.* Part No.*
(Small) (Large)
Servo release accumulator 31526-41X03 26.9 (1.059) 31526-41X02 44.2 (1.740)
N-D accumulator 31526-31X08 34.6 (1.362) 31672-21X00 39.4 (1.551)

RETURN SPRING
Unit: mm (in) A
Accumulator Part number* Free length Outer diameter
Servo release accumulator 31605-80X00 52.5 (2.067) 20.1 (0.791)
B
N-D accumulator 31605-31X15 43.5 (1.713) 28.0 (1.102)
Clutch and Brakes ACS007VZ AT

REVERSE CLUTCH
Model code number 85X64, 85X65
D
Number of drive plates 2
Number of driven plates 2
Standard 1.6 (0.063) E
Drive plate thickness mm (in)
Wear limit 1.4 (0.055)
Driven plate thickness mm (in) Standard 1.8 (0.071)
Standard 0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031) F
Clearance mm (in)
Thickness mm (in) Part number*
G
6.6 (0.260) 31537-80X78
6.8 (0.268) 31537-80X79
Thickness of retaining plates 7.0 (0.276) 31537-80X80
7.2 (0.283) 31537-80X81 H
7.4 (0.291) 31537-80X82
7.6 (0.299) 31537-80X20
7.8 (0.307) 31537-80X21
I
HIGH CLUTCH
J
Number of driven plates 7*1 + 1*2 K
Standard 1.6 (0.063)
L
*1 Standard 1.4 (0.055)
Driven plate thickness mm (in)
*2 Standard 2.0 (0.079)
Standard 1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087) M
Clearance mm (in)
3.2 (0.126) 31537-81X11
3.6 (0.142) 31537-81X13
3.8 (0.150) 31537-81X14
4.0 (0.157) 31537-81X15

FORWARD CLUTCH
Standard 0.45 - 0.85 (0.0177 - 0.0335)
Clearance mm (in)
Wear limit 1.85 (0.0728)
3.2 (0.126) 31537-80X76
3.4 (0.134) 31537-80X75
3.8 (0.150) 31537-80X71
4.0 (0.157) 31537-80X72
4.2 (0.165) 31537-80X73
4.4 (0.173) 31537-80X74
OVERRUN CLUTCH
Standard 0.7 - 1.1 (0.028 - 0.043)
Clearance mm (in)
3.0 (0.118) 31537-80X65
3.4 (0.134) 31537-80X67
3.6 (0.142) 31537-80X68
3.8 (0.150) 31537-80X69

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE

A

Number of driven plates 6 B
Driven plate thickness mm (in) Standard 1.8 (0.071) AT
Standard 1.7 - 2.1 (0.067 - 0.083)
Clearance mm (in)
D
2.0 (0.079) 31667-80X10
2.2 (0.087) 31667-80X11 E
2.4 (0.094) 31667-80X12
2.8 (0.110) 31667-80X14
3.0 (0.118) 31667-80X15 F
3.2 (0.126) 31667-80X16
3.4 (0.134) 31667-80X17
G
CLUTCH AND BRAKE RETURN SPRINGS
Unit: mm (in)
Parts Part number* Free length Outer diameter H
Forward clutch (Overrun clutch)
31505-80X02 21.4 (0.843) 10.3 (0.406)
(22 pcs)
High clutch (12 pcs) 31505-80X05 22.5 (0.886) 10.8 (0.425) I
Low & reverse brake (24 pcs) 31505-80X07 24.1 (0.949) 6.6 (0.260)
J
BRAKE BAND
Anchor end pin tightening torque N·m (kg-m, in-lb) 4.9 (0.50, 43)
Number of returning revolutions for anchor end pin 2.5
K
Lock nut tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 34 (3.5, 25)
Final Drive ACS007W0 L

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE
Clearance between side gear and differential case with
0.1 - 0.2 (0.004 - 0.008)
washer mm (in) M
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS

0.75 (0.0295) 38424-81X00
0.80 (0.0315) 38424-81X01
0.85 (0.0335) 38424-81X02
0.90 (0.0354) 38424-81X03
0.95 (0.0374) 38424-81X04

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTING SHIMS

0.48 (0.0189) 31438-80X00
0.52 (0.0205) 31438-80X01
0.56 (0.0220) 31438-80X02
0.60 (0.0236) 31438-80X03
0.64 (0.0252) 31438-80X04
0.68 (0.0268) 31438-80X05
0.72 (0.0283) 31438-80X06
0.76 (0.0299) 31438-80X07
0.80 (0.0315) 31438-80X08
0.84 (0.0331) 31438-80X09
0.88 (0.0346) 31438-80X10
0.92 (0.0362) 31438-80X11
BEARING PRELOAD
Differential side bearing preload mm (in) 0.05 - 0.09 (0.0020 - 0.0035)
TURNING TORQUE
Turning torque of final drive assembly N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) 0.78 - 1.37 (8.0 - 14.0, 6.9 - 12.2)
Planetary Carrier and Oil Pump ACS007W1
PLANETARY CARRIER
Clearance between planetary carrier Standard 0.20 - 0.70 (0.0079 - 0.0276)
and pinion washer mm (in) Allowable limit 0.80 (0.0315)
OIL PUMP
Oil pump side clearance mm (in) 0.030 - 0.050 (0.0012 - 0.0020)
Inner gear
11.99 - 12.0 (0.4720 - 0.4724) 31346-80X00
11.98 - 11.99 (0.4717 - 0.4720) 31346-80X01
11.97 - 11.98 (0.4713 - 0.4717) 31346-80X02
Thickness of inner gears and outer gears
Outer gear
11.99 - 12.0 (0.4720 - 0.4724) 31347-80X00
11.98 - 11.99 (0.4717 - 0.4720) 31347-80X01
11.97 - 11.98 (0.4713 - 0.4717) 31347-80X02
Clearance between oil pump Standard 0.111 - 0.181 (0.0044 - 0.0071)

housing and outer gear mm (in) Allowable limit 0.181 (0.0071)
Oil pump cover seal ring Standard 0.1 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
clearance mm (in) Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098)
Input Shaft ACS007W2
SEAL RING CLEARANCE

Standard 0.08 - 0.23 (0.0031 - 0.0091)
Input shaft seal ring clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit 0.23 (0.0091)
SEAL RING
Outer diameter mm (in) Inner diameter mm (in) Width mm (in) Part number*
26 (1.024) 22.4 (0.882) 1.97 (0.078) 31525 80X02

Reduction Pinion Gear ACS007W3
TURNING TORQUE A
Turning torque of reduction pinion gear N·m (kg-cm, in-lb) 0.05 - 0.39 (0.5 - 4.0, 0.43 - 3.47)
REDUCTION PINION GEAR ADJUSTING SHIMS B

NO. Thickness mm (in) Part number NO. Thickness mm (in) Part number*
1 5.00 (0.1969) 31439-81X00 33 5.64 (0.2220) 31439-81X63
AT
2 5.02 (0.1976) 31439-81X01 34 5.66 (0.2228) 31439-81X64
3 5.04 (0.1984) 31439-81X02 35 5.68 (0.2236) 31439-81X65
4 5.06 (0.1992) 31439-81X03 36 5.70 (0.2244) 31439-81X66 D
5 5.08 (0.2000) 31439-81X04 37 5.72 (0.2252) 31439-81X67
6 5.10 (0.2008) 31439-81X05 38 5.74 (0.2260) 31439-81X68
7 5.12 (0.2016) 31439-81X06 39 5.76 (0.2268) 31439-81X69 E
8 5.14 (0.2024) 31439-81X07 40 5.78 (0.2276) 31439-81X70
9 5.16 (0.2031) 31439-81X08 41 5.80 (0.2283) 31439-81X71
F
10 5.18 (0.2039) 31439-81X09 42 5.82 (0.2291) 31439-81X72
11 5.20 (0.2047) 31439-81X10 43 5.84 (0.2299) 31439-81X73
12 5.22 (0.2055) 31439-81X11 44 5.86 (0.2307) 31439-81X74 G
13 5.24 (0.2063) 31439-81X12 45 4.60 (0.1811) 31439-85X01
14 5.26 (0.2071) 31439-81X13 46 4.62 (0.1819) 31439-85X02
H
15 5.28 (0.2079) 31439-81X14 47 4.64 (0.1827) 31439-85X03
16 5.30 (0.2087) 31439-81X15 48 4.66 (0.1835) 31439-85X04
17 5.32 (0.2094) 31439-81X16 49 4.68 (0.1843) 31439-85X05 I
18 5.34 (0.2102) 31439-81X17 50 4.70 (0.1850) 31439-85X06
19 5.36 (0.2110) 31439-81X18 51 4.72 (0.1858) 31439-83X11
J
20 5.38 (0.2118) 31439-81X19 52 4.74 (0.1866) 31439-83X12
21 5.40 (0.2126) 31439-81X20 53 4.76 (0.1874) 31439-83X13
22 5.42 (0.2134) 31439-81X21 54 4.78 (0.1882) 31439-83X14 K
23 5.44 (0.2142) 31439-81X22 55 4.80 (0.1890) 31439-83X15
24 5.46 (0.2150) 31439-81X23 56 4.82 (0.1898) 31439-83X16
25 5.48 (0.2157) 31439-81X24 57 4.84 (0.1906) 31439-83X17
L
26 5.50 (0.2165) 31439-81X46 58 4.86 (0.1913) 31439-83X18

27 5.52 (0.2173) 31439-81X47 59 4.88 (0.1921) 31439-83X19
M
28 5.54 (0.2181) 31439-81X48 60 4.90 (0.1929) 31439-83X20
29 5.56 (0.2189) 31439-81X49 61 4.92 (0.1937) 31439-83X21
30 5.58 (0.2197) 31439-81X60 62 4.94 (0.1945) 31439-83X22
31 5.60 (0.2205) 31439-81X61 63 4.96 (0.1953) 31439-83X23
32 5.62 (0.2213) 31439-81X62 64 4.98 (0.1961) 31439-83X24
Band Servo ACS007W4
RETURN SPRING
Unit: mm (in)
Return spring Part number* Free length Outer diameter
2nd servo return spring 31605-31X20 32.5 (1.280) 25.9 (1.020)
OD servo return spring 31605-80X07 62.6 (2.465) 21.7 (0.854)

Output Shaft ACS007W5
SEAL RING CLEARANCE

Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Output shaft seal ring clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098)
SEAL RING
Outer diameter mm (in) Inner diameter mm (in) Width mm (in) Part number*
33.71 (1.327) 30.25 (1.191) 1.95 (0.077) 31525 80X09
END PLAY
Output shaft end play mm (in) 0 - 0.15 (0 - 0.0059)
OUTPUT SHAFT ADJUSTING SHIMS

0.80 (0.0315) 31438-80X60
0.84 (0.0331) 31438-80X61
0.88 (0.0346) 31438-80X62
0.92 (0.0362) 31438-80X63
0.96 (0.0378) 31438-80X64
1.00 (0.0394) 31438-80X65
1.04 (0.0409) 31438-80X66
1.08 (0.0425) 31438-80X67
1.12 (0.0441) 31438-80X68
1.16 (0.0457) 31438-80X69
1.20 (0.0472) 31438-80X70
Bearing Retainer ACS007W6
SEAL RING CLEARANCE

Bearing retainer seal ring Standard 0.10 - 0.30 (0.0039 - 0.0118)
clearance mm (in) Allowable limit 0.30 (0.0118)
Total End Play ACS007W7
Total end play mm (in) 0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217)
BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY

0.8 (0.031) 31435-80X00
1.0 (0.039) 31435-80X01
1.2 (0.047) 31435-80X02
1.4 (0.055) 31435-80X03
1.6 (0.063) 31435-80X04
1.8 (0.071) 31435-80X05
2.0 (0.079) 31435-80X06
0.9 (0.035) 31435-80X09
1.1 (0.043) 31435-80X10
1.3 (0.051) 31435-80X11
1.5 (0.059) 31435-80X12
1.7 (0.067) 31435-80X13
1.9 (0.075) 31435-80X14
Reverse Clutch End Play ACS007W8
Reverse clutch end play mm (in) 0.61 - 1.0 (0.0240 - 0.039)

THRUST WASHERS FOR ADJUSTING REVERSE CLUTCH DRUM END PLAY

A
0.80 (0.0315) 31508-80X13

0.95 (0.0374) 31508-80X14
1.10 (0.0433) 31508-80X15 B
1.25 (0.0492) 31508-80X16
1.40 (0.0551) 31508-80X17
1.55 (0.0610) 31508-80X18
1.70 (0.0669) 31508-80X19 AT
1.85 (0.0728) 31508-80X20
D
Removal and Installation ACS007W9
Unit: mm (in)
Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter 14 (0.55) E
Shift Solenoid Valves ACS007WA
Gear position 1 2 3 4 F
G
Solenoid Valves ACS007WB
Solenoid valves Resistance (Approx.) Ω Terminal

H
Shift solenoid valve A 20 - 30 2
Shift solenoid valve B 5 - 20 1
Overrun clutch solenoid valve 20 - 30 3 I
Line pressure solenoid valve 2.5 - 5 4
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 5 - 20 5
J
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor ACS007WC
Condition Specification (Approximately)

K
Cold [20°C (68°F)] 1.5V 2.5 kΩ
↓ ↓ ↓
Hot [80°C (176°F)] 0.5V 0.3 kΩ
L
Revolution Sensor ACS007WD
Condition Judgement standard

M
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. 450 Hz (Approx.)
When vehicle parks. Under 1.3V or over 4.5V
Dropping Resistor ACS007WE
Resistance 12 Ω (Approx.)


Xtrail 05 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Xtrail 05 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Xtrail 05 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the purpose of the document?

What components are discussed in the transmission control system section?

What components are discussed in the transmission control system section?

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Revision: 2005 March AT-1 2005 X-Trail

Revision: 2005 March AT-2 2005 X-Trail

Revision: 2005 March AT-3 2005 X-Trail

Revision: 2005 March AT-4 2005 X-Trail

INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024

SHIFT SOLENOID/V A*2 P0750 AT-162

SHIFT SOLENOID/V B*2 P0755 AT-167 J

THROTTLE POSI SEN*2 P1705 AT-172 K

Revision: 2005 March AT-5 2005 X-Trail

DTC No. Index ACS008HU

P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID/V B*2 AT-167

P1705 THROTTLE POSI SEN*2 AT-172

Revision: 2005 March AT-6 2005 X-Trail

● Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness con-

Revision: 2005 March AT-7 2005 X-Trail

● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

● Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal

● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

Revision: 2005 March AT-8 2005 X-Trail

Service Notice or Precautions ACS007QO

ATF COOLER SERVICE A

Revision: 2005 March AT-9 2005 X-Trail

Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ACS007QP

When reading wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

Revision: 2005 March AT-10 2005 X-Trail

KV381054S0 ● Removing differential side bearing outer race

ST33400001 ● Installing differential side oil seal

ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure

Revision: 2005 March AT-11 2005 X-Trail

ST23540000 Removing and installing parking rod plate and

ST25710000 Aligning groove of manual shaft and hole of

KV32101000 ● Installing manual shaft retaining pin

KV31102400 Removing and installing clutch return springs

KV40100630 ● Installing reduction pinion gear bearing inner race

ST30720000 Installing idler gear bearing outer race

ST35321000 Installing output shaft bearing

Revision: 2005 March AT-12 2005 X-Trail

ST33230000 Installing differential side bearing inner race

ST33220000 Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim D

Revision: 2005 March AT-13 2005 X-Trail

KV38107700 Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim

KV38105210 ● Selecting differential side bearing adjusting shim

Revision: 2005 March AT-14 2005 X-Trail

Commercial Service Tools ACS007QR

Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

Puller Removing idler gear bearing inner race D

Drift Installing manual shaft oil seal

Drift Removing radial needle bearing from bearing

Revision: 2005 March AT-15 2005 X-Trail

Tool name Description

Drift Installing differential side bearing outer race

Drift Installing differential side bearing outer race

Revision: 2005 March AT-16 2005 X-Trail

A/T FLUID PFP:KLE40

Closed throttle position signal(5) (2) X (2) X X (4) X

Input Wide open throttle position signal(5) (2) X (2) X (4) X

Stop lamp switch signal(5) X X X (4) X